FCC ID: B94-AX200NGWT Intel Wireless -AX200NGW

 

User Guide Copyright 2019 HP Development Company, L.P. Product notice Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: March 2019 Document Part Number: L52100-001 This guide describes features that are common to most products. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows 10 is automatically updated, which is always enabled. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. Go to http://www.microsoft.com for details. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. Software terms By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1). iii iv Safety warning notice Processor configuration setting (select products only) IMPORTANT: Select products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. v vi Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1 Getting started ............................................................................................................................................. 1 Best practices ......................................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources ................................................................................................................................................. 2 2 Getting to know your computer ...................................................................................................................... 3 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating software .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Right side ............................................................................................................................................................... 4 Left side ................................................................................................................................................................. 5 Display .................................................................................................................................................................... 7 Keyboard area ........................................................................................................................................................ 8 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................................. 8 Lights ................................................................................................................................................... 9 Speakers and fingerprint reader ....................................................................................................... 10 Special keys ....................................................................................................................................... 11 Action keys ........................................................................................................................................ 12 Bottom ................................................................................................................................................................. 13 Labels ................................................................................................................................................................... 13 3 Connecting to a network .............................................................................................................................. 15 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................................... 15 Using the wireless controls ............................................................................................................... 15 Airplane mode key .......................................................................................................... 15 Operating system controls ............................................................................................. 15 Connecting to a WLAN ....................................................................................................................... 16 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) .......................................................................... 17 Using GPS (select products only) ...................................................................................................... 17 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) ................................................................. 17 Connecting Bluetooth devices ........................................................................................ 17 Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) ............................................................................. 18 4 Enjoying entertainment features .................................................................................................................. 19 Using the camera ................................................................................................................................................. 19 Using audio .......................................................................................................................................................... 19 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................................... 19 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................................... 19 vii Connecting headsets ......................................................................................................................... 20 Using sound settings ......................................................................................................................... 20 Using video .......................................................................................................................................................... 20 Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) ............................................ 20 Setting up HDMI audio .................................................................................................... 21 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) ...... 22 Using data transfer .............................................................................................................................................. 22 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) ..................................................... 22 5 Navigating the screen .................................................................................................................................. 23 Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures ........................................................................................................ 23 Tap ..................................................................................................................................................... 23 Two-finger pinch zoom ..................................................................................................................... 24 Two-finger slide (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ...................................................................... 24 Two-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ........................................................................ 24 Three-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ..................................................................... 25 Four-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ....................................................................... 25 Three-finger swipe (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) ................................................................. 26 Four-finger swipe (Precision TouchPad) ........................................................................................... 26 One-finger slide (touch screen) ......................................................................................................... 27 Using an optional keyboard or mouse ................................................................................................................. 27 6 Managing power .......................................................................................................................................... 28 Using Sleep and Hibernation ............................................................................................................................... 28 Initiating and exiting Sleep ............................................................................................................... 28 Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) ................................................................. 29 Shutting down (turning off) the computer .......................................................................................................... 29 Using the Power icon and Power Options ............................................................................................................ 30 Running on battery power ................................................................................................................................... 30 Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) .................................................................................... 30 Displaying battery charge ................................................................................................................. 31 Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) .................................. 31 Conserving battery power ................................................................................................................. 31 Identifying low battery levels ........................................................................................................... 31 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................................ 32 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ................................... 32 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................................. 32 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation .................. 32 Factory-sealed battery ...................................................................................................................... 32 Running on external power ................................................................................................................................. 32 viii 7 Maintaining your computer .......................................................................................................................... 34 Improving performance ....................................................................................................................................... 34 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................................................. 34 Using Disk Cleanup ............................................................................................................................ 34 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ................................................................................ 34 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status .............................................................................. 35 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 35 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 35 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................................... 35 Cleaning the display ........................................................................................................ 36 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................................. 36 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) ............................. 36 Traveling with or shipping your computer .......................................................................................................... 36 8 Securing your computer and information ...................................................................................................... 38 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 38 Setting Windows passwords ............................................................................................................. 38 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................................. 39 Using Windows Hello (select products only) ....................................................................................................... 40 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................................... 40 Using antivirus software ................................................................................................................... 40 Using firewall software ..................................................................................................................... 40 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................................. 41 Using HP Device as a Service (select products only) ........................................................................................... 41 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................................... 41 Backing up your software applications and information .................................................................................... 41 Using an optional security cable (select products only) ..................................................................................... 41 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................................. 42 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ................................................................................................................................ 42 Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) .............................................................................................................................. 42 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................................... 42 Downloading a BIOS update .............................................................................................................. 43 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 44 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) ................................................................. 44 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ....................................................................... 44 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version ....................... 45 Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 45 ix Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ............................................................................. 45 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ............................................................................................................. 45 Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ....................................................................................... 46 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive .............................................. 46 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version .............................. 46 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 46 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) ............................................. 47 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ................................................................. 47 Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ................. 47 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number ............................................................................................................................ 47 Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings .................................................... 47 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ......................................................................................................... 49 Backing up information and creating recovery media ........................................................................................ 49 Using Windows tools ......................................................................................................................... 49 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) ..... 49 Restoring and recovery ........................................................................................................................................ 50 Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools .............................................................. 50 Recovering using HP Recovery media ............................................................................................... 50 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................................................... 50 12 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 51 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 51 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 52 13 Electrostatic discharge .............................................................................................................................. 53 14 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................................. 54 Accessibility ......................................................................................................................................................... 54 Finding the technology tools you need ............................................................................................ 54 Our commitment ............................................................................................................................... 54 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) ....................................................... 54 Finding the best assistive technology .............................................................................................. 55 Assessing your needs ..................................................................................................... 55 Accessibility for HP products .......................................................................................... 55 Standards and legislation .................................................................................................................................... 56 Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 56 Mandate 376 EN 301 549 ............................................................................................ 56 x Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) ................................................................ 56 Legislation and regulations .............................................................................................................. 56 United States ................................................................................................................... 57 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) ............................... 57 Canada ............................................................................................................................. 57 Europe ............................................................................................................................. 58 United Kingdom .............................................................................................................. 58 Australia .......................................................................................................................... 58 Worldwide ....................................................................................................................... 58 Useful accessibility resources and links .............................................................................................................. 59 Organizations .................................................................................................................................... 59 Educational institutions .................................................................................................................... 59 Other disability resources ................................................................................................................. 59 HP links .............................................................................................................................................. 59 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 60 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 61 xi xii 1 Getting started This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer, fun things to do with your computer, and where to find additional HP resources. Best practices After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

Back up your hard drive by creating recovery media. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 49. If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 15. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 3 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 19. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 40. Best practices 1 More HP resources To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Table 1-1 Additional information Resource Setup Instructions HP support For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Overview of computer setup and features Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Contents Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Electrical and mechanical safety information Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP may provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1 Getting started 2 Getting to know your computer Your computer features top-rated components. This chapter provides details about your components, where they are located, and how they work. Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Locating hardware 3 Right side Component

(1) Camera privacy switch Turns the camera off and on. Description NOTE:

on page 19. For more information, see Using the camera

(2) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components.

(3) USB Type-C port with HP Sleep and Charge NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects a USB device that has a Type-C connector, provides data transfer, and even when the computer is off, charges most products such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch. and Connects a display device that has a USB Type-C connector, providing DisplayPort output. NOTE: Cables and/or adapters (purchased separately) may be required. Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and even when the computer is off, charges most products such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) device. USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge

(4)

(5) HDMI port 4 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Left side Component Description

(1) Power connector Connects an AC adapter.

(2) AC adapter and battery light

(3)

(4) USB SuperSpeed port Connects a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and provides high-speed data transfer. Power button and power light Power button:

White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is fully charged. Blinking white: The AC adapter is disconnected and the battery has reached a low battery level. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. Off: The battery is not charging. When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep (select products only). When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options:

Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. Power light:

On: The computer is on. Left side 5 Component Description

(5) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components.

(6) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-

saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional standalone microphones. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Reads optional memory cards that enable you to store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

1. 2. Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the computer. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

card reader. Press in on the card, and then remove it from the memory

(7) Memory card reader 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Display Component Internal microphones Camera Description Record sound.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Camera light WLAN antennas*

Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using the camera on page 19. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Using Windows Hello (select products only) on page 40. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product. On: The camera is in use. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs).

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Display 7 Component Description

(1) TouchPad zone Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. For more information, see Using TouchPad and touch NOTE:

screen gestures on page 23. Left TouchPad button Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Right TouchPad button Functions like the right button on an external mouse.

(2)

(3) Keyboard area TouchPad 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Lights Component Description

(1) Caps lock light

(2) Mute light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital letters. On: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. Keyboard area 9 Speakers and fingerprint reader Component

(1)

(2) Speakers (2) Fingerprint reader Description Produce sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. To use the fingerprint reader, place your finger on the fingerprint reader until it reads your fingerprint. See Using Windows Hello (select products only) on page 40 for details. 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Special keys Component Description esc key fn key

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) num lock key Integrated numeric keypad Windows key Opens the Start menu. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes specific functions when pressed in combination with another key. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. NOTE: On select products, the f5 action key turns the keyboard backlight feature off or on. Alternates between the navigational and numeric functions on the integrated numeric keypad. A separate keypad to the right of the alphabet keyboard. When num lock is pressed, the keypad can be used like an external numeric keypad. If the keypad function is active when the computer is NOTE:

turned off, that function is reinstated when the computer is turned back on. Keyboard area 11 Action keys An action key performs the function indicated by the icon on the key. To determine which keys are on your product, see Special keys on page 11. To use an action key, press and hold the key. Icon Description Helps prevent side-angle viewing from onlookers. If needed, decrease or increase brightness for well-lit or darker environments. Press the key again to turn off the privacy screen. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Opens the How to get help in Windows 10 webpage. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Turns the keyboard backlight off or on. On select products, you can adjust the brightness of the keyboard backlight. Press the key repeatedly to adjust the brightness from high (when you first start up the computer), to low, to off. After you adjust the keyboard backlight setting, the backlight will revert to your previous setting each time you turn on the computer. The keyboard backlight will turn off after 30 seconds of inactivity. To turn the keyboard backlight back on, press any key or tap the TouchPad (select products only). To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a Blu-ray Disc (BD). Starts, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Stops audio or video playback of a CD, a DVD, or a BD. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Icon Description Mutes or restores speaker sound. Turns the airplane mode and wireless feature on or off. NOTE: The airplane mode key is also referred to as the wireless button. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Bottom Labels Component Vent Description Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels may be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you may be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Bottom 13 Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) HP product name Model number Product ID Serial number Warranty period Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) HP product name Product ID Serial number Warranty period Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleGives you wireless connectivity over a wireless wide area network

(WWAN), a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features:

Airplane mode key (also called wireless button or wireless key) (referred to in this chapter as airplane mode key) Using the wireless controls Operating system controls Airplane mode key The computer may have an airplane mode key, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings. To use operating system controls:

or On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Connecting to a wireless network 15 Connecting to a WLAN NOTE: When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. To connect to a WLAN, follow these steps:

Be sure that the WLAN device is on. 1. 2. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then connect to one of the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to:

1. On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings. or 2. 3. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Under the Change your network settings section, select Network and Sharing Center. Select Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. After the connection is made, right-click the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. 16 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The number may be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. or 1. 2. 3. On the taskbar, select the network status icon. Select Network & Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet section, select Cellular, and then select Advanced Options. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM) card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it may be included with the HP Mobile Broadband documents provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using GPS (select products only) Your computer may be equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. To enable GPS, make sure location is enabled under the Location setting. Type location in the taskbar search box, select Location privacy settings, and then select a setting. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse External keyboard 1. 2. Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. Type bluetooth in the taskbar search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. Enable Bluetooth, if it is not already enabled. Connecting to a wireless network 17 3. 4. 1. 2. Select Add Bluetooth or other device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device you are adding, follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some NOTE:

devices may have additional requirements; refer to the documentation provided with the device. Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an RJ-45 (network) cable and a network jack or an optional docking device or expansion port, if there is no RJ-45 jack on the computer. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. 18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the camera, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, TV, speakers, or headphones. Using the camera Your computer has one or more cameras that enable you to connect with others for work or play. Cameras may be front facing, rear facing, or pop up. To determine which camera(s) are on your product, see Getting to know your computer on page 3. Most cameras allow you to video chat, record video, and record still images. Some also provide HD (high-

definition) capability, apps for gaming, or facial recognition software like Windows Hello. See Securing your computer and information on page 38 for details about using Windows Hello. On select products, you can also enhance your camera privacy by turning the camera off. By default, the camera is turned on. To turn off your camera, slide the camera privacy switch toward the icon next to the switch. To turn the camera back on, slide the switch away from the icon. To use your camera, type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Using audio Connecting speakers You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on the computer (on select products) or attach an external optical drive to play CDs. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 21. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack or to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using the camera 19 Connecting headsets WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. To view or change sound settings:

and then select Sound. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, Your computer may include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, B&O, or another provider. As a result, your computer may include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your sound system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your USB Type-C features, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 20 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. Press f4 to cycle through four display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of NOTE:

the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select the Settings icon System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes.

, and then select Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. Select Set Default, and then select OK. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. On the Playback tab, select Speakers. Select Set Default, and then select OK. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Using video 21 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then select Project to a second screen. Select Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using data transfer Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information about using your USB Type-C features, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. 22 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features 5 Navigating the screen You can navigate the computer screen using one or more of the following methods:

Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen. Use touch gestures on the TouchPad. Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately). Use an on-screen keyboard. Use a pointing stick. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures The TouchPad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. To customize gestures and see videos of how they work, type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. Some products include a Precision TouchPad, which provides enhanced gesture functionality. To determine if you have a Precision TouchPad and find additional information, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on both the TouchPad and a touch screen. Tap Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 23 Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger slide (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Two-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) Tap two fingers on the TouchPad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with a mouse. 24 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Three-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) By default, the three-finger tap opens Cortana, a voice-activated virtual assistant. Tap three fingers on the TouchPad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a Precision TouchPad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger tap (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) By default, the four-finger tap opens the Action Center. Tap four fingers on the TouchPad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a Precision TouchPad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 25 Three-finger swipe (TouchPad and Precision TouchPad) By default, the three-finger swipe switches between open apps and the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe 3 fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers left or right to switch between open windows. To change the function of this gesture on a Precision TouchPad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger swipe (Precision TouchPad) By default, the four-finger swipe switches between open desktops. Swipe 4 fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe 4 fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe 4 fingers left or right to switch between desktops. To change the function of this gesture, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. 26 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen One-finger slide (touch screen) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an optional keyboard or mouse 27 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using Sleep and Hibernation CAUTION: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 28. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level or the computer has been in the Sleep state for an extended period of time. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) on page 29. Initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. Close the display (select products only). Press the Sleep hot key (select products only); for example, fn+f1or fn+f12. Briefly press the power button (select products only). You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the computer is closed, raise the display (select products only). Press a key on the keyboard (select products only). Tap the TouchPad (select products only). When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows password NOTE:

before your work returns to the screen. 28 Chapter 6 Managing power Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. In the left pane, select Choose what the power buttons do (wording may vary by product). Depending on your product, you can enable Hibernation for battery power or external power in any of the following ways:

Power buttonUnder Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the power button, and then select Hibernate. Sleep button (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the sleep button, and then select Hibernate. Lid (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I close the lid, and then select Hibernate. Power menuSelect Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate check box. The Power menu can be accessed by selecting the Start button. 4. Select Save changes. To initiate Hibernation, use the method that you enabled in step 3. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Windows NOTE:

password before your work returns to the screen. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly NOTE:

pressing the power button. Save your work and close all open programs. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. Shutting down (turning off) the computer 29 If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 10 seconds. If your computer has a user-replaceable battery (select products only), disconnect the computer from external power, and then remove the battery. Using the Power icon and Power Options The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. To use Power Options, right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. Different Power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in the computer slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: When you disconnect external power, the display brightness is automatically decreased to conserve battery charge. Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. Charging time may vary by

+/- 10%. Depending on your computer model and the HP AC adapter provided with your computer, HP Fast Charge operates in one or more of the following ways:

When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 50%, the battery will charge to 50% of full capacity in no more than 30 to 45 minutes, depending on your computer model. When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 90%, the battery will charge to 90% of full capacity in no more than 90 minutes. To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. 30 Chapter 6 Managing power Displaying battery charge To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) To access battery information:

1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

HP Battery Check Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power To conserve battery power and maximize battery life:

Lower the brightness of the display. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:

The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or NOTE:

on page 30. The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon and Power Options The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Running on battery power 31 Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power:

AC adapter Optional docking device or expansion product Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run HP Battery Check in the HP Support Assistant app (select products only). 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. Running on external power For information about connecting to external power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking device or expansion product. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. Connect the computer to external power under any of the following conditions:

When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or updating system software When updating the system BIOS When writing information to a disc (select products only) 32 Chapter 6 Managing power 1. 2. When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external power:

The battery begins to charge. The screen brightness increases. The Power icon changes appearance. When you disconnect external power:

The computer switches to battery power. The screen brightness automatically decreases to conserve battery charge. The Power icon changes appearance. Running on external power 33 7 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance Using Disk Defragmenter You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

Connect the computer to AC power. Type defragment in the taskbar search box, and then select Defragment and Optimize Drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

Type disk in the taskbar search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 34 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay and/or the drive in a secondary hard drive bay (select products only) is parked. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. If you would like to update your programs and drivers, follow these instructions:

1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My notebook, select the Updates tab, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Solution of water and mild soap Static-free cloth wipes Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents or germicidal wipes that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, hydrogen peroxide, naphtha, and hydrocarbon solvents are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is on. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Updating programs and drivers 35 CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display Cleaning the sides or cover Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that a display is dry before you close the computer. To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously, or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that 36 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 37 8 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. NOTE: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in HP Setup Utility (BIOS), which is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. To create and save passwords, use the following tips:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every 3 months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords:

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Setting Windows passwords Table 8-1 Types of Windows passwords and their functions Password User password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Administrator password Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility

(BIOS) contents. 38 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Table 8-2 Types of BIOS passwords and their functions Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility (BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

IMPORTANT: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. 1. Start Setup Utility (BIOS):

Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Tablets without keyboards:

1. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume up button.

- or -

- or -

2. Tap f10. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button. 2. Select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To save your changes, select Exit, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using passwords 39 Using Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, you can use Windows Hello to sign in by swiping your finger or looking at the camera. To set up Windows Hello:

To add a password, select Add. 1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions enroll your fingerprint or facial ID and set up a PIN. NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length. The default setting is for numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols check box. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. 40 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. To view or change the settings:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security. Select Windows Update, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Device as a Service (select products only) HP DaaS is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP DaaS helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and helps reduce time spent solving device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. For more information, go to https://www.hptouchpointmanager.com/. Securing your wireless network When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Installing software updates 41 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: To start Setup Utility on convertible computers, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached to your notebook. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Turn on or restart the computer and quickly press f10. or Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10 when the Start menu is displayed. Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) Updated versions of Setup Utility (BIOS) may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Setup Utility (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. To reveal the BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS), use one of these options. HP Support Assistant or 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Select My notebook, and then select Specifications. Setup Utility (BIOS) 1. 2. 3. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 42). Select Main, and then make note of the BIOS version. Select Exit, select one of the options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. In Windows, press CTRL+Alt+S. 42 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 43. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any NOTE:

software updates, especially system BIOS updates. 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS version, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that appear on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions appear, follow these steps:

Type file in the taskbar search box, and then select File Explorer. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) 43 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is a Windows-based utility that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs within the Windows operating system in order to diagnose hardware failures. If HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is not installed on your computer, first you must download and install it. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows on page 44. After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Help and Support or HP Support Assistant. 1. To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support:

Select the Start button, and then select HP Help and Support. Right-click HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, select More, and then select Run as administrator. a. b. or or b. c. instructions. To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant:

a. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes. Select Diagnostics, and then select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. 2. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test at any time, select Cancel. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. The screen displays one of the following options:

A Failure ID link is displayed. Select the link and follow the on-screen instructions. A Quick Response (QR) code is displayed. With a mobile device, scan the code and then follow the on-

screen instructions. Instructions for calling support are displayed. Follow those instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows download instructions are provided in English only. You must use a Windows computer to download this tool because only .exe files are provided. 44 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:

Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics Windows, and then select a location on your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:

product name or number. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number, follow these steps:

Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, and then enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed. In the Diagnostics section, select Download, and then follow the on-screen instructions to select the specific Windows diagnostics version to be downloaded to your computer or USB flash drive. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows To install HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:

Navigate to the folder on your computer or the USB flash drive where the .exe file was downloaded, double-click the .exe file, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE:

For Windows 10 S computers, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 46. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. If your PC will not boot into Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. For assistance in solving the problem:

Select Get Support, and then use a mobile device to scan the QR code that displays on the next screen. The HP Customer Support - Service Center page displays, with your Failure ID and product number automatically filled in. Follow the on-screen instructions. or Contact support, and provide the Failure ID code. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI 45 NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode, and you must use the attached keyboard. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow these steps:

Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. 1. 2. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 46. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 1. 2. 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in the following situations:

HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstall image. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI download instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive:

Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics UEFI, and then select Run. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the NOTE:

product name or number. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) to a USB flash drive:

46 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is a firmware (BIOS) feature that downloads HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to your computer. It can then execute the diagnostics on your computer, and it may upload results to a preconfigured server. For more information about Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags, and then select Find out more. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE: HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is also available as a Softpaq that can be downloaded to a server. Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version, follow these steps:

Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download Remote Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number For some products, it may be necessary to download the software by using the product name or NOTE:

number. To download HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number, follow these steps:

Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the Remote UEFI version for the product. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings Using the Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics setting in Computer Setup (BIOS), you can perform the following customizations:

Set a schedule for running diagnostics unattended. You can also start diagnostics immediately in interactive mode by selecting Execute Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics. Set the location for downloading the diagnostic tools. This feature provides access to the tools from the HP website or from a server that has been preconfigured for use. Your computer does not require the traditional local storage (such as a disk drive or USB flash drive) to run remote diagnostics. Set a location for storing the test results. You can also set the user name and password settings used for uploads. Display status information about the diagnostics run previously. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) 47 To customize Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings, follow these steps:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. 1. 2. Select Advanced, and then select Settings. 3. Make your customization selections. 4. Select Main, and then Save Changes and Exit to save your settings. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. 48 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes, which are standard procedure for most products:

Backing up your personal informationYou can use Windows tools to back up your personal information (see Using Windows tools on page 49). Creating a restore pointYou can use Windows tools to create a restore point (see Using Windows tools on page 49). Creating recovery media (select products only)You can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool

(select products only) to create recovery media (see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) on page 49). Restoring and recoveryWindows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state (see Using Windows tools on page 49). IMPORTANT:

70% charged before you start the recovery process. If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least IMPORTANT:

beginning any recovery process. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before Backing up information and creating recovery media Using Windows tools IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. You can use Windows tools to back up personal information and create system restore points and recovery media. NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. For more information and steps, see the Get Help app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get Help app. Enter the task you want to perform. NOTE: You must be connected to the Internet to access the Get Help app. Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) You can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create HP Recovery media on a bootable USB flash drive, as follows:

Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 1. 2. 1. 2. Backing up information and creating recovery media 49 If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restoring and recovery Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools Windows offers several options for restoring, resetting, and refreshing the computer. For details, see Using Windows tools on page 49. Recovering using HP Recovery media HP Recovery media is used to recover the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory. On select products, it can be created on a bootable USB flash drive using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool. For details, see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) on page 49. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To recover your system:

Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart using the HP Recovery media, you can change the computer boot order. This is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection to an optical drive or a USB flash drive, depending on the location of your HP Recovery media. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before To change the boot order:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. 1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access the system Startup menu. For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume up button, and then select f9. For tablets without keyboards:

or Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume down button, and then select f9. 3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 50 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source that is supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Table 12-1 DC power specifications Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A / 15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.9 A 135 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A 200 W 19.5 V dc @ 11.8 A 230 W 19.5 V dc @ 16.92 A 330 W DC plug of external HP power supply (select products only) NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. Input power 51 Operating environment Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Operating Nonoperating Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft 52 Chapter 12 Specifications 13 Electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 53 14 Accessibility Accessibility HP is working to weave diversity, inclusion and work/life into the fabric of our company, so it is reflected in everything we do. Here are some examples of how we are putting differences to work to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 55. Our commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports our company's diversity objectives and helps us ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. Our accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve our goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide our actions as a company. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within our company, and provide our employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines, and in the design and testing of products and services. Document accessibility features and make information about our products and services publicly available in an accessible form. Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that will improve assistive technology relevant to our products and services. Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. 54 Chapter 14 Accessibility HP is a founding member, and we joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports our companys accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that can be effectively used by people with disabilities. IAAP will make our profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You may choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, may also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products The following links provide information about accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable, included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and product(s) most appropriate for your situation. HP Elite x3Accessibility Options (Windows 10 Mobile) HP PCsWindows 7 Accessibility Options HP PCsWindows 8 Accessibility Options HP PCsWindows 10 Accessibility Options HP Slate 7 TabletsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Tablet (Android 4.1/Jelly Bean) HP SlateBook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features (Android 4.3,4.2/Jelly Bean) HP Chromebook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Chromebook or Chromebox (Chrome OS) HP Shoppingperipherals for HP products If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 60. Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Microsoft Office) Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) Accessibility 55 Assistive Technologies sorted by impairment type Assistive Technologies sorted by product type Assistive Technology vendors with product descriptions Assistive Technology Industry Association (ATIA) Standards and legislation Standards Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards was created by the US Access Board to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance-based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multi-media, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The EN 301 549 standard was created by the European Union within Mandate 376 as the basis for an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the functional accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, together with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each accessibility requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and navigability) Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) Legislation and regulations Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. This section provides links to information about key legislation, regulations, and standards. United States Canada Europe 56 Chapter 14 Accessibility United Kingdom Australia Worldwide United States www.section508.gov Buy Accessible Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act specifies that agencies must identify which standards apply to the procurement of ICT, perform market research to determine the availability of accessible products and services, and document the results of their market research. The following resources provide assistance in meeting Section 508 requirements:

The U.S. Access Board is currently updating the Section 508 standards. This effort will address new technologies and other areas where the standards need to be modified. For more information, go to Section 508 Refresh. Section 255 of the Telecommunications Act requires telecommunications products and services to be accessible to people with disabilities. FCC rules cover all hardware and software telephone network equipment and telecommunications equipment used in the home or office. Such equipment includes telephones, wireless handsets, fax machines, answering machines, and pagers. FCC rules also cover basic and special telecommunications services, including regular telephone calls, call waiting, speed dialing, call forwarding, computer-provided directory assistance, call monitoring, caller identification, call tracing, and repeat dialing, as well as voice mail and interactive voice response systems that provide callers with menus of choices. For more information, go to Federal Communication Commission Section 255 information. 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) The CVAA updates federal communications law to increase the access of persons with disabilities to modern communications, updating accessibility laws enacted in the 1980s and 1990s to include new digital, broadband, and mobile innovations. Regulations are enforced by the FCC and documented as 47 CFR Part 14 and Part 79. FCC Guide on the CVAA Other U.S. legislation and initiatives Canada Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Telecommunications Act, the Rehabilitation Act and others The Accessibility for Ontarians with Disabilities Act was established to develop and implement accessibility standards to make goods, services, and facilities accessible to Ontarians with disabilities and to provide for the involvement of persons with disabilities in the development of the accessibility standards. The first standard of the AODA is the customer service standard; however, standards for transportation, employment, and information and communication are also being developed. The AODA applies to the Government of Ontario, the Legislative Assembly, every designated public sector organization, and to every other person or organization that provides goods, services, or facilities to the public or other third parties and that has at least one employee in Ontario; and accessibility measures must be implemented on or before January 1, 2025. For more information, go to Accessibility for Ontarians with Disability Act (AODA) . Standards and legislation 57 Europe EU Mandate 376 ETSI Technical Report ETSI DTR 102 612: "Human Factors (HF); European accessibility requirements for public procurement of products and services in the ICT domain (European Commission Mandate M 376, Phase 1)" has been released. Background: The three European Standardization Organizations have set up two parallel project teams to carry out the work specified in the European Commission "Mandate 376 to CEN, CENELEC and ETSI, in Support of Accessibility Requirements for Public Procurement of Products and Services in the ICT Domain."

ETSI TC Human Factors Specialist Task Force 333 has developed ETSI DTR 102 612. Further details about the work performed by STF333 (e.g., Terms of Reference, specification of the detailed work tasks, time plan for the work, previous drafts, listing of comments received and means to contact the task force) can be found at the Special Task Force 333. The parts relating to the assessment of suitable testing and conformity schemes were carried out by a parallel project, detailed in CEN BT/WG185/PT. For further information, go to the CEN project team website. The two projects are closely coordinated. CEN project team European Commission mandate for e-accessibility (PDF 46KB) The Disability Discrimination Act of 1995 (DDA) was enacted to ensure that websites are accessible to blind and disabled users in the United Kingdom. United Kingdom W3C UK Policies Australia Worldwide JTC1 Special Working Group on Accessibility (SWG-A) G3ict: The Global Initiative for Inclusive ICT Italian accessibility legislation W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) The Australian government has announced their plan to implement Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0. All Australian government websites will require Level A compliance by 2012, and Double A by 2015. The new standard replaces WCAG 1.0, which was introduced as a mandated requirement for agencies in 2000. 58 Chapter 14 Accessibility Useful accessibility resources and links The following organizations may be good resources for information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you may encounter on the Internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) Lighthouse International National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Educational institutions California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program Other disability resources ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program Business & Disability network EnableMart European Disability Forum Job Accommodation Network Microsoft Enable U.S. Department of Justice - A Guide to disability rights Laws HP links Our contact webform HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales Useful accessibility resources and links 59 Contacting support NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing that have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products, choose one of the following options:

Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Complete the Contact form for people with disabilities or age-related limitations. 60 Chapter 14 Accessibility Index A AC adapter and battery light, identifying 5 accessibility 54 accessibility needs assessment 55 action keys airplane mode 13 help 12 identifying 11, 12 keyboard backlight 12 mute 13 next track 12 pause 12 play 12 privacy screen 12 screen brightness 12 speaker volume 12 stop 12 switch screen image 12 using 12 airplane mode 15 airplane mode key 13, 15 antivirus software, using 40 assistive technology (AT) finding 55 purpose 54 AT (assistive technology) finding 55 purpose 54 audio 19 adjusting volume 12 HDMI audio 21 headphones 19 headsets 20 sound settings 20 speakers 19 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack, identifying 6 B backing up software and information 41 backup, creating 49 backups 49 battery conserving power 31 discharging 31 factory-sealed 32 finding information 31 low battery levels 31 resolving low battery level 32 battery charge 31 battery information, finding 31 battery power 30 best practices 1 BIOS determining version 42 downloading an update 43 starting the Setup Utility 42 updating 42 Bluetooth device 15, 17 Bluetooth label 14 boot order, changing 50 bottom components 13 buttons left TouchPad 8 power 5 right TouchPad 8 C camera identifying 7 using 19 connectors power 5 corporate WLAN connection 16 critical battery level 31 customer support, accessibility 60 D data transfer 22 Disk Cleanup software 34 Disk Defragmenter software 34 display components 7 E electrostatic discharge 53 esc key, identifying 11 external power, using 32 F factory-sealed battery 32 fingerprint reader, identifying 10 fingerprints, registering 40 firewall software 40 fn key, identifying 11 four-finger tap TouchPad gesture 25 G Get Help in Windows 10 action key camera light, identifying 7 camera privacy switch, identifying 4 caps lock light, identifying 9 caring for your computer 35 cleaning your computer 35 components 12 GPS 17 H hardware, locating 3 HDMI port connecting 20 identifying 4 bottom 13 display 7 keyboard area 8 left side 5 right side 4 connecting to a network 15 connecting to a wireless network 15 connecting to a WLAN 16 connecting to LAN 18 headphones, connecting 19 headsets, connecting 20 Hibernation exiting 29 initiated during critical battery level 31 initiating 29 20, 22 high-definition devices, connecting Index 61 HP 3D DriveGuard 34 HP Assistive Policy 54 HP Device as a Service (HP DaaS) 41 HP Fast Charge 30 HP Mobile Broadband L labels num lock 11 Windows 11 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI activating 17 IMEI number 17 MEID number 17 downloading 46 starting 46 using 45 downloading 44 installing 45 using 44 HP Recovery Manager HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows correcting boot problems 50 HP Recovery media recovery 50 HP resources 2 HP Touchpoint Manager 41 I IMEI number 17 initiating Sleep and Hibernation 28 input power 51 installing optional security cable 41 integrated numeric keypad, identifying 11 internal microphones, identifying 7 International Association of Accessibility Professionals 54 Internet security software, using 40 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 6 K keyboard and optional mouse using 27 keyboard backlight action key 12 keypad, integrated numeric 11 keys action 11 airplane mode 13 esc 11 fn 11 Bluetooth 14 regulatory 14 serial number 13 service 13 wireless certification 14 WLAN 14 left side components 5 lights AC adapter and battery 5 camera 7 caps lock 9 mute 9 power 5 low battery level 31 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 34 Disk Defragmenter 34 updating programs and drivers 35 managing power 28 MEID number 17 Miracast 22 mobile broadband activating 17 IMEI number 17 MEID number 17 mute light, identifying 9 mute volume action key 13 N next track action key 12 O one-finger slide touch screen gesture 27 operating environment 52 operating system controls 15 P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 39 Windows 38 pause action key 12 play action key 12 62 Index ports HDMI 4, 20 USB SuperSpeed 5 USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge 4 USB Type-C 22 USB Type-C with HP Sleep and Charge 4 power battery 30 external 32 power button, identifying 5 power connector identifying 5 Power icon, using 30 power lights, identifying 5 power settings, using 30 Precision TouchPad using 23 Precision TouchPad gestures four-finger tap 25 three-finger swipe 26 three-finger tap 25 two-finger slide 24 two-finger tap 24 privacy screen action key 12 privacy screen action key, identifying 12 product name and number, computer 13 public WLAN connection 16 R recovery 49 discs 50 HP Recovery partition 50 media 50 USB flash drive 50 recovery media creating using HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool 49 creating using Windows tools 49 regulatory information regulatory label 14 wireless certification labels 14 Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings customizing 47 using 47 resources, accessibility 59 using 40 Windows key, identifying 11 Windows passwords 38 Windows tools, using 49 wired network (LAN) 18 wireless button 15 wireless certification label 14 wireless controls button 15 operating system 15 wireless light 15 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 16 corporate WLAN connection 16 functional range 16 public WLAN connection 16 wireless network, securing 41 WLAN antennas, identifying 7 WLAN device 14 WLAN label 14 WWAN device 17 restoring 49 right side components 4 TouchPad and touch screen gestures Windows Hello 19 tap 23 two-finger pinch zoom 24 S screen brightness action keys 12 Section 508 accessibility standards TouchPad buttons identifying 8 TouchPad gestures 56, 57 security cable, installing 41 serial number, computer 13 service labels, locating 13 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 39 shipping the computer 36 shutdown 29 Sleep exiting 28 initiating 28 four-finger tap 25 three-finger swipe 26 three-finger tap 25 two-finger slide 24 two-finger tap 24 TouchPad zone, identifying 8 transfer data 22 traveling with the computer 14, 36 turning off the computer 29 two-finger pinch zoom TouchPad and Sleep and Hibernation, initiating 28 slots touch screen gesture 24 two-finger slide TouchPad gesture memory card reader 6 24 software Disk Cleanup 34 Disk Defragmenter 34 locating 3 software installed locating 3 software updates, installing 41 sound. See audio sound settings, using 20 speaker volume action keys 12 speakers connecting 19 identifying 10 special keys, using 11 standards and legislation, accessibility 56 two-finger tap TouchPad gesture 24 U unresponsive system 29 updating programs and drivers 35 USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge, identifying 4 USB SuperSpeed port, identifying 5 USB Type-C port with HP Sleep and Charge, identifying 4 USB Type-C port, connecting 22 using passwords 38 using the keyboard and optional mouse 27 using the TouchPad 23 stop action key 12 switch screen image action key 12 system restore point, creating 49 V vents, identifying 4, 6, 13 video T tap TouchPad and touch screen three-finger swipe TouchPad gesture 23 gesture 26 three-finger tap TouchPad gesture 25 touch screen gestures one-finger slide 27 TouchPad using 23 HDMI port 20 USB Type-C 22 wireless displays 22 video, using 20 volume adjusting 12 mute 13 W Windows backup 49 recovery media 49 system restore point 49 Index 63

 

 

Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2018 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: July 2018 First Edition: March 2018 Document Part Number: L25269-002 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information. NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices ........................................................................................................................................ 1 Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 1 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................. 2 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 European Union regulatory notices ....................................................................................................................... 4 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 4 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ........................................................................... 4 Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) ....................... 4 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products only) ................... 4 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................. 5 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 5 China WWAN notice ................................................................................................................................................ 6 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................ 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ...................................................................................................................................... 7 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand wireless notice ........................................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices .............................................. 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 8 Telecommunications device approvals ................................................................................................................. 9 Modem notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 U.S. modem statements ...................................................................................................................... 9 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................................. 10 Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 12 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 12 v New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 12 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 13 Macrovision Corporation notice ........................................................................................................................... 13 2 Safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 14 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 14 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 15 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................................... 15 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 15 Acoustics notice ................................................................................................................................................... 15 Battery notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 15 Fan notices ........................................................................................................................................................... 16 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 16 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 16 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 17 Power supply class I grounding requirements .................................................................................. 17 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 17 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 17 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 17 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 17 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 17 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 17 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 18 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................................ 18 Power cord notice .............................................................................................................................. 18 DC plug of external HP power supply ............................................................................. 19 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 19 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 19 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 19 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 19 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 19 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 19 Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................................... 20 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 20 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 21 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 21 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 21 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................................... 22

......................................................................................................................................... 22 vi 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 23 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 23 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 23 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 23 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 23 Taiwan battery recycling information ................................................................................................................. 24 ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ............................................................................................ 24 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 25 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................................. 25 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 25 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 26 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 26 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) for notebook and tablet computers ................................... 29 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................................................... 29

..................................................................... 30 China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-

ones, and point-of-sale terminals ....................................................................................................................... 31 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................................................... 31

(ROHS) .................................................................................................................................................................. 33

(RoHS) ..................................................... 35

....................................................................................................... 35

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................................................... 36

....................................................................................................... 36 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 37 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 37 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 37 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 37 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico .................................................................. 37 Turkey WEEE regulation ...................................................................................................................................... 38 TCO Certified ........................................................................................................................................................ 39 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 40 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 41 vii viii 1 Regulatory notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select products only), under the removable service door (select products only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the system BIOS. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

Turn on or restart the computer. Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. 4. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. Accessing regulatory labels 1 If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. 2. For questions regarding this product:

Write to:

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Call HP at 650-857-1501 or Email techregshelp@hp.com To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Modifications Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Ao operar o dispositivo a uma distncia muito prxima do seu corpo, utilize um acessrio de armazenamento no metlico para posicionar o dispositivo a uma distncia mnima de 1,5 cm do corpo. CAUTION: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. Brazil notice 3 CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member State and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU. Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: http://www.hp.eu/certificates

(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Germany. Email techregshelp@hp.com Products with radio functionality (EMF) This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) CAUTION: IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.155.35 GHz frequency band is restricted for indoor use only in all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might lead to interference issues with existing radio services. CAUTION: Fixed outdoor installations for WiGig application (5766 GHz frequency band) are excluded in all countries reflected in the matrix. Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products only) Radio Technology Bluetooth; 2,4 GHz NFC; 13,56 MHz Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) 100 10 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) Less than 1 Radio Technology RFID; 125 kHz/13,56 MHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2600 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz 100 200 200 250 2000 1000 316 NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance. Ergonomics notice When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit

(VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use for VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sunlight) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-

mouse and monitor. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/

regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. Australia and New Zealand notice 5 China WWAN notice Japan notice V-2 VCCI32-1 5GHz Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section. e e Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. The regulatory model number for this product is on the regulatory label. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. The regulatory model number for this product is on the regulatory label. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are aboard aircraft. The use of these devices aboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. South Korea notices Thailand wireless notice

(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.) This radio communication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Radio communication Equipment on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Singapore wireless notice 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Modem notices U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. Telecommunications device approvals 9 The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Modem notices 11 Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision Corporation notice 13 2 Safety notices Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety, the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet, to avoid the risk of electrical shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. As a safety precaution, if the system power load exceeds the specific configurations capacities, the system may temporarily disable some USB ports. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, CAUTION:

the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/

region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. 14 Chapter 2 Safety notices This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC/EN 60950-1). Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the mobile computer, do not place the mobile computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the mobile computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The mobile computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC/EN 60950-1). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. WARNING! Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Acoustics notice Battery notices Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779). To display product noise emission data, go to IT ECO Declarations at http://www.hp.com/go/ted, and then select a product category from the drop-down menu. WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. WARNING! Do not attempt to recharge the battery. WARNING! Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Fast charging may not be available for non-compatible or non-HP batteries. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Heat-related safety warning notice 15 WARNING! Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard. WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away WARNING!

from children. WARNING!

immediate medical attention. If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek WARNING!

explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Icon Description Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. Fan notices WARNING!

Keep body parts away from moving parts. WARNING! Keep body parts away from fan blades. WARNING! Keep body parts out of the motion path. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. 16 Chapter 2 Safety notices Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or an HP Inc. authorized replacement. Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Brazil notice Denmark Finland Norway Sweden Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Power supply and power cord set requirements 17 For use in Norway Power cord set requirements This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V. 1. 2. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from HP Inc. or an approved HP Inc. source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/support. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The length of the power cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet). For a power cord 2.0 m

(6.56 feet) or less, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG. If the power cord is longer than 2.0 m (6.56 feet), the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 1.0 mm2 or 16AWG. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices DC plug of external HP power supply Japan power cord notice Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. TV antenna connectors protection External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Pinch hazard 19 Table 2-1 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 20 Chapter 2 Safety notices China safety notices China: Altitude notice 2000m Icon Description 2000m China: Tropical warning notice Icon Description China safety notices 21 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system.

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 22 Chapter 2 Safety notices 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users Icon Description This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Brazil hardware recycling information Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling 23 Taiwan battery recycling information Icon Description The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances Mercury statement HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. This statement applies to all-in-one computers with built-in display panels that do not use LED backlighting. This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. Chemical substances 25 China environmental notices China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers, this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Category B 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa Category C 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa Category D 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa Portable Computer Category A 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa Category B 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa Category C 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 2 GB The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. A Discrete GPU 1. 2. 1. 2. Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. China PC energy label 27 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) for notebook and tablet computers The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by Chinas Management Methods for Restricted Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products Part Name Lead (Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Hazardous Substances Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power pack Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) for notebook and tablet computers 29 Hazardous Substances Mercury Cadmium Lead (Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) Part Name TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 30 Chapter 3 Environmental notices

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

/Java USB USB X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

(Cr(VI)) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by Chinas Management Methods for Restricted Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) for desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-

ones, and point-of-sale terminals 31 Hazardous Substances Part Name Lead (Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Flash memory card reader Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Fan Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones Heat sink I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Projector Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Solid-state drives Speakers, external Stylus Touch mat TV tuner USB flash memory drive X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 32 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Hazardous Substances Mercury Cadmium Lead (Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Part Name USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards 3D Capture Stage/

Turntable

I/O PCA This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

(ROHS)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

(ROHS) 33

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI))

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB 3D /

X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 34 Chapter 3 Environmental notices

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Cables

Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power pack Power supply Storage Devices Wireless Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption.

(RoHS) 35 http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides.

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead Mercury Cadmium

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Unit Cables

/ Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel (for AIO only) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power supply Storage Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. 36 Chapter 3 Environmental notices India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016." It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. IT ECO declarations Notebook or tablet PCs http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/iteconotebook-o.html Desktop PCs and Thin Clients Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 37 Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a las estaciones de trabajo. Turkey WEEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur 38 Chapter 3 Environmental notices TCO Certified This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo. TCO Certified 39 TCO Certified Edge This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. 40 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Index Symbols/Numerics 35, 36 Federal Communications Commission notices notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 35, 36 notebook computers notice 1 A airline travel notice 8 altitude notice 21 B battery 15 battery notice 8, 23 battery recycling 23 Brazil notice 3, 17 C cable grounding notice 22 Canada modem statement 12 Canada notices 3 China environmental notices 26 China PC energy label 26 China restriction of hazardous substances notice 29, 31 D disposal notices battery 23 battery, user replacement 8 equipment 23 factory sealed battery 8 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 23 ENERGY STAR certification 24 environmental notices 23 equipment disposal notice 23 ergonomics notice 5 European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 37 F fan notice 16 G GS Notice 5 H headset and earphone volume level notice 16 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 37 J Japan modem statement 12 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 19 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 37 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 9, 16 M Macrovision Corporation notice 13 maximum power levels 4 Mexico wireless notice 6 modem notices 9 modem statements Canada 12 Japan 12 New Zealand 12 U.S. 9, 10 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 12 airline travel 8 battery 8, 15, 23 Brazil 3, 17 Canada 3 China restriction of hazardous substances 29, 31 environmental 23 equipment disposal 23 ergonomics 5 fan 16 headset and earphone volume level 16 India restriction of hazardous substances 37 Japan 6 Japan power cord 19 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 37 laser safety 9, 16 Macrovision Corporation 13 Mexico 6 modem 9 perchlorate material 25 power cords 18 Singapore 7 South Korea 7 Taiwan 7 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel 20 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 1 P power cord notice 18 R radio frequency bands 4 recycling, electronic hardware and battery 23 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 7 Index 41 T Taiwan notice 7 TCO Certified Certification 39 TCO Certified Edge Certification 40 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel notice 20 tropical warning notice 21 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 22 U U.S. modem statement 9, 10 V voice support 13 volume level notice, headset and earphone 16 W wireless LAN devices 3 42 Index

 

 

User Guide

SUMMARY

This guide provides information about components, network connection, power management, security, backing up,

and more.

Software terms

By installing, copying, downloading, or

otherwise using any software product

preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be

bound by the terms of the HP End User License

Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these

license terms, your sole remedy is to return the

entire unused product (hardware and software)

within 14 days for a full refund subject to the

refund policy of your seller.

For any further information or to request a full

refund of the price of the computer, please

contact your seller.

This guide describes features that are common

to most products. Some features might not be

available on your computer.

Not all features are available in all editions or

versions of Windows. Systems might require

upgraded and/or separately purchased

hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to

take full advantage of Windows functionality.

Windows 10 is automatically updated, which is

always enabled. ISP fees might apply and

additional requirements might apply over time

for updates. Go to http://www.microsoft.com

for details.

To access the latest user guides, go to

http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the

instructions to find your product. Then select

Manuals.

© Copyright 2021 HP Development Company,

L.P.

Product notice

Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its

proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license.

Intel, Celeron, Pentium, and Thunderbolt are

trademarks of Intel Corporation or its

subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or other countries.

Windows is either a registered trademark or

trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries. USB

Type-C® and USB-C® are registered trademarks

of USB Implementers Forum. DisplayPort™ and

the DisplayPort™ logo are trademarks owned

by the Video Electronics Standards Association

(VESA) in the United States and other countries.

Miracast® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi

Alliance.

The information contained herein is subject to

change without notice. The only warranties for

HP products and services are set forth in the

express warranty statements accompanying

such products and services. Nothing herein

should be construed as constituting an

additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for

technical or editorial errors or omissions

contained herein.

First Edition: January 2021

Document Part Number: M38058-001

Safety warning notice

Reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer by following the practices

described.

WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place

the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat

surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as

pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the

skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter

comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards.

iii

iv

Safety warning notice

Processor configuration setting (select products only)

Important information about processor configurations.

IMPORTANT: Select products are configured with an Intel® Pentium® N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron®

N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows® operating system. If your computer is

configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2

processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory

reset to restore the original settings.

v

vi

Processor configuration setting (select products only)

Table of contents

1 Getting started ............................................................................................................................................. 1

Best practices ......................................................................................................................................................... 1

More HP resources ................................................................................................................................................. 1

2 Getting to know your computer ...................................................................................................................... 3

Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 3

Locating software .................................................................................................................................................. 3

Right side ............................................................................................................................................................... 3

Left side ................................................................................................................................................................. 4

Display .................................................................................................................................................................... 6

Low blue light mode (select products only) ........................................................................................ 6

Keyboard area ........................................................................................................................................................ 7

Touchpad settings and components ................................................................................................... 7

Touchpad settings ............................................................................................................. 8

Adjusting touchpad settings .......................................................................... 8

Turning on the touchpad ................................................................................ 8

Touchpad components ...................................................................................................... 8

Lights ................................................................................................................................................... 9

Button, vents, and fingerprint reader ............................................................................................... 10

Special keys ....................................................................................................................................... 11

Action keys ........................................................................................................................................ 12

Rear ...................................................................................................................................................................... 13

Bottom ................................................................................................................................................................. 14

Labels ................................................................................................................................................................... 14

3 Connecting to a network .............................................................................................................................. 16

Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................................... 16

Using the wireless controls ............................................................................................................... 16

Airplane mode key .......................................................................................................... 16

Operating system controls ............................................................................................. 16

Connecting to a WLAN ....................................................................................................................... 17

Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) .......................................................................... 17

Using eSIM (select products only) ..................................................................................................... 18

Using GPS (select products only) ...................................................................................................... 18

Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) ................................................................. 18

Connecting Bluetooth devices ........................................................................................ 18

vii

Connecting to a wired network—LAN (select products only) ............................................................................. 19

4 Enjoying entertainment features .................................................................................................................. 20

Using the camera ................................................................................................................................................. 20

Using audio .......................................................................................................................................................... 20

Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................................... 20

Connecting headphones .................................................................................................................... 20

Connecting headsets ......................................................................................................................... 21

Using sound settings ......................................................................................................................... 21

Sound settings ................................................................................................................ 21

Audio settings ................................................................................................................. 21

Using video .......................................................................................................................................................... 21

Connecting a Thunderbolt device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) ....................... 21

Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) ............................................ 22

Connecting a high-definition TV or monitor using HDMI ................................................ 22

Setting up HDMI audio .................................................................................................... 23

Turn on HDMI audio ...................................................................................... 23

Return audio to computer speakers ............................................................. 23

Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) ...... 24

Using data transfer .............................................................................................................................................. 24

Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) ..................................................... 24

5 Navigating the screen .................................................................................................................................. 25

Using touchpad and touch screen gestures ........................................................................................................ 25

Tap ..................................................................................................................................................... 25

Two-finger pinch zoom ..................................................................................................................... 25

Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) ....................................................................... 26

Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ......................................................................... 26

Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ...................................................................... 26

Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ........................................................................ 27

Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad) .................................................................. 27

Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) ............................................................................................ 27

One-finger slide (touch screen) ......................................................................................................... 28

Using an optional keyboard or mouse ................................................................................................................. 28

Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) .......................................................................................... 28

6 Managing power .......................................................................................................................................... 29

Using Sleep and Hibernation ............................................................................................................................... 29

Initiating and exiting Sleep ............................................................................................................... 29

Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) ................................................................. 30

viii

Shutting down (turning off) the computer .......................................................................................................... 30

Using the Power icon and Power Options ............................................................................................................ 31

Running on battery power ................................................................................................................................... 31

Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) .................................................................................... 31

Displaying battery charge ................................................................................................................. 31

Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) .................................. 31

Conserving battery power ................................................................................................................. 32

Identifying low battery levels ........................................................................................................... 32

Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................................ 32

Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ................................... 32

Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................................. 33

Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation .................. 33

Factory-sealed battery ...................................................................................................................... 33

Running on external power ................................................................................................................................. 33

7 Maintaining your computer .......................................................................................................................... 35

Improving performance ....................................................................................................................................... 35

Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................................................. 35

Using Disk Cleanup ............................................................................................................................ 35

Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ................................................................................ 35

Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status .............................................................................. 36

Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 36

Updating programs and drivers using Windows 10 .......................................................................... 36

Updating programs using Windows 10 S .......................................................................................... 36

Updating drivers using Windows 10 S .............................................................................................. 36

Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 37

Enabling HP Easy Clean (select products only) ................................................................................. 37

Removing dirt and debris from your computer ................................................................................ 37

Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant ..................................................................................... 38

Caring for wood veneer (select products only) ................................................................................. 38

Traveling with or shipping your computer .......................................................................................................... 39

8 Securing your computer and information ...................................................................................................... 40

Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 40

Setting Windows passwords ............................................................................................................. 40

Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................................. 41

Using Windows Hello (select products only) ....................................................................................................... 41

Using internet security software ......................................................................................................................... 42

Using antivirus software ................................................................................................................... 42

Using firewall software ..................................................................................................................... 42

Installing software updates ................................................................................................................................. 42

ix

Using HP Device as a Service (select products only) ........................................................................................... 43

Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................................... 43

Backing up your software applications and information .................................................................................... 43

Using an optional security cable (select products only) ..................................................................................... 43

9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................................. 44

Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ................................................................................................................................ 44

Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) .............................................................................................................................. 44

Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................................... 44

Preparing for a BIOS update .............................................................................................................. 45

Downloading a BIOS update ........................................................................................... 45

Installing a BIOS update .................................................................................................. 45

10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 47

Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) ................................................................. 47

Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code ...................................... 47

Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ............................................................................ 47

Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 47

Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from Support Assistant ................... 47

Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Start menu (select

products only) ................................................................................................................. 48

Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ....................................................................... 48

Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version from HP ......... 48

Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store ..... 48

Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 48

Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ............................................................................. 49

Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ............................................................................................................. 49

Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI hardware failure ID code ............................................. 49

Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ....................................................................................... 49

Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive .............................................. 50

Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version .............................. 50

Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 50

Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) ............................................. 51

Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ................................................................. 51

Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ................. 51

Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or

number ............................................................................................................................ 51

Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings .................................................... 51

x

11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ......................................................................................................... 53

Backing up information and creating recovery media ........................................................................................ 53

Using Windows tools for backing up ................................................................................................. 53

Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only) ..... 53

Restoring and recovering your system ............................................................................................................... 53

Creating a system restore ................................................................................................................. 54

Restoring and recovery methods ...................................................................................................... 54

Recovering using HP Recovery media ............................................................................................... 54

Changing the computer boot order ................................................................................................... 54

Using HP Sure Recover (select products only) .................................................................................. 55

12 Electrostatic discharge .............................................................................................................................. 56

13 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 57

Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 57

Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 58

14 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................................. 59

HP and accessibility ............................................................................................................................................. 59

Finding the technology tools you need ............................................................................................ 59

The HP commitment ......................................................................................................................... 59

International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) ....................................................... 60

Finding the best assistive technology .............................................................................................. 60

Assessing your needs ..................................................................................................... 60

Accessibility for HP products .......................................................................................... 60

Standards and legislation .................................................................................................................................... 61

Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 61

Mandate 376 – EN 301 549 ............................................................................................ 61

Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) ................................................................ 61

Legislation and regulations .............................................................................................................. 61

Useful accessibility resources and links .............................................................................................................. 62

Organizations .................................................................................................................................... 62

Educational institutions .................................................................................................................... 62

Other disability resources ................................................................................................................. 62

HP links .............................................................................................................................................. 63

Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 63

Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 64

xi

xii

1

Getting started

This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment.

Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer, fun things to do with your

computer, and where to find additional HP resources.

Best practices

After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your

smart investment:

●

●

●

●

●

Back up your hard drive by creating recovery media. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering

on page 53.

If you haven’t already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a

network on page 16.

Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know

your computer on page 3 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 20.

Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 42.

Access HP Support Assistant app—For quick online support, open the HP Support Assistant app (select

products only). HP Support Assistant optimizes computer performance and resolves problems using the

latest software updates, diagnostic tools, and guided assistance. Type support in the taskbar search

box, and then select HP Support Assistant. Then select Support.

More HP resources

To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table.

Table 1-1 Additional information

Resource

Setup Instructions

HP support

‒ or –

‒ or –

For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and

follow the instructions to find your product.

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select

HP Support Assistant. Then select Support.

Select the question mark icon in the taskbar search box.

Then select Support.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Contents

Overview of computer setup and features

Online chat with an HP technician

Support telephone numbers

Replacement parts videos (select products only)

Maintenance and service guides

HP service center locations

Safety & Comfort Guide

Proper workstation setup

To access this guide:

Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort

and decrease your risk of injury

1

Table 1-1 Additional information (continued)

Contents

▲ Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search

●

Electrical and mechanical safety information

box, and then select HP Documentation.

Resource

‒ or –

Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices

●

Important regulatory notices, including information about proper

battery disposal, if needed.

●

Specific warranty information about this computer

▲ Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo.

IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet

to access the latest version of the user guide.

To access this document:

▲ Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search

box, and then select HP Documentation.

Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

▲ Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search

box, and then select HP Documentation.

‒ or –

▲ Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments.

IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet

to access the latest version of the user guide.

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In

some countries or regions, HP might provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided

in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can

write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone

number, and postal address.

2

Chapter 1 Getting started

2

Getting to know your computer

Your computer features top-rated components. This chapter provides details about your components, where

they are located, and how they work.

Locating hardware

Locating software

To find out what hardware is installed on your computer, type device manager in the taskbar search box,

and then select the Device Manager app.

For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only).

To find out what software is installed on your computer, right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and

Features.

Right side

Identify the components on the right side of the computer.

Table 2-1 Right-side components and their descriptions

Component

(1)

(2)

Magnetic pen attachment area

Holds an optional pen.

Memory card reader

Reads optional memory cards that enable you to store, manage,

share, or access information.

Description

To insert a card:

To remove a card:

card reader.

1.

2.

Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the

computer.

Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then

press in on the card until it is firmly seated.

▲ Press in on the card, and then remove it from the memory

3

Table 2-1 Right-side components and their descriptions (continued)

Component

Description

(3)

USB SuperSpeed port

(4)

AC adapter and battery light

Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and

(for select products) charges small devices (such as a

smartphone) when the computer is on or in Sleep mode.

NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-A charging cable or cable

adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external

device.

●

●

●

●

White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is fully

charged.

Blinking amber: The AC adapter is disconnected and the

battery has reached a low battery level.

Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is

charging.

Off: The battery is not charging.

If you connect both the USB Type-C and the barrel AC

NOTE:

adapters to your computer at the same time, only one AC

adapter and battery light turns on. The light next to the USB

Type-C power connector turns on when the Type-C adapter

power rating is less than the barrel adapter rating. The light next

to the barrel power connector turns on when the barrel AC

adapter power rating is the same or greater than the Type-C

adapter rating.

NOTE: Some computers might ship with two separate AC

adapters and power cords. Be sure to match the connector end

of the power cord to the corresponding USB Type-C or barrel

power connector of your computer.

(5)

Power connector

Connects an AC adapter.

Left side

Identify the components on the left side of the computer.

NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer.

Table 2-2 Left-side components and their descriptions

Component

Description

(1)

USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and Charge

Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and

charges small devices (such as a smartphone), even when the

computer is off.

NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-A charging cable or cable

adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external

device.

4

Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer

Table 2-2 Left-side components and their descriptions (continued)

Component

Description

HDMI port

(2)

(3)

USB Type-C® power connector and SuperSpeed

port with HP Sleep and Charge

Connects an AC adapter that has a USB Type-C connector,

supplying power to the computer and, if needed, charging the

computer battery.

Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component,

or a high-speed High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI)

device.

– and –

– and –

Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and

charges small devices (such as a smartphone), even when the

computer is off.

NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-C charging cable or cable

adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external

device.

Connects a display device that has a USB Type-C connector,

providing DisplayPort™ output.

NOTE: Some computers might ship with two separate AC

adapters and power cords. Be sure to match the connector end

of the power cord to the corresponding USB Type-C or barrel

power connector of your computer.

●

●

●

●

White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is fully

charged.

Blinking amber: The AC adapter is disconnected and the

battery has reached a low battery level.

Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is

charging.

Off: The battery is not charging.

If you connect both the USB Type-C and the barrel AC

NOTE:

adapters to your computer at the same time, only one AC

adapter and battery light turns on. The light next to the USB

Type-C power connector turns on when the Type-C adapter

power rating is less than the barrel adapter rating. The light next

to the barrel power connector turns on when the barrel AC

adapter power rating is the same or greater than the Type-C

adapter rating.

Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones,

earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an

optional headset microphone. This jack does not support

optional standalone microphones.

WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the

volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset.

For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety,

and Environmental Notices.

To access this guide:

▲ Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box,

and then select HP Documentation.

Left side

5

(4)

AC adapter and battery light

(5)

Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone)

combo jack

Table 2-2 Left-side components and their descriptions (continued)

Component

Description

(6)

USB Type-C power connector and Thunderbolt™

port with HP Sleep and Charge

NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer

speakers are disabled.

Connects an AC adapter that has a USB Type-C connector,

supplying power to the computer and, if needed, charging the

computer battery.

– and –

– and –

Connects a USB device, provides high-speed data transfer, and

charges small devices (such as a smartphone), even when the

computer is off.

NOTE: Use a standard USB Type-C charging cable or cable

adapter (purchased separately) when charging a small external

device.

Connects a display device that has a USB Type-C connector,

providing DisplayPort output.

NOTE: Your computer might also support a Thunderbolt

docking station.

NOTE: Some computers might ship with two separate AC

adapters and power cords. Be sure to match the connector end

of the power cord to the corresponding USB Type-C or barrel

power connector of your computer.

Display

The computer display can include essential components such as speakers, antennas, cameras, and

microphones.

Low blue light mode (select products only)

Your computer display is shipped from the factory in low blue light mode for improved eye comfort and

safety. Also, blue light mode automatically adjusts blue light emissions when you are using the computer at

night or for reading.

WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper

workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort

Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. The Safety & Comfort Guide is

available on the web at http://www.hp.com/ergo.

6

Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer

Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions

Component

Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

WLAN antennas*

Camera

Internal microphones (2)

Record sound.

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local

area networks (WLANs).

Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use

your camera, see Using the camera on page 20. Some cameras also

allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password

logon. For more information, see Using Windows Hello (select

products only) on page 41.

NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware

and software installed on your product.

(4)

Camera light

On: The camera is in use.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the

antennas free from obstructions.

For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or

region.

To access this guide:

▲ Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Documentation.

Keyboard area

Keyboards can vary by language.

Touchpad settings and components

Learn the touchpad settings and components

Keyboard area

7

Touchpad settings

Learn how to adjust touchpad settings.

Adjusting touchpad settings

Choose a setting.

Turning on the touchpad

1.

2.

1.

2.

Touchpad components

Identify the touchpad components.

Use these steps to adjust touchpad settings and gestures.

Type touchpad settings in the taskbar search box, and then press enter.

Follow these steps to turn on the touchpad.

Type touchpad settings in the taskbar search box, and then press enter.

Using an external mouse, click the touchpad button.

If you are not using an external mouse, press the Tab key repeatedly until the pointer rests on the

touchpad button. Then press the spacebar to select the button.

Table 2-4 Touchpad components and their descriptions

Component

Description

(1)

Touchpad zone

Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items

on the screen.

For more information, see Using touchpad and touch

NOTE:

screen gestures on page 25.

8

Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer



 

 

Table 2-4 Touchpad components and their descriptions (continued)

Description

Component

(2)

(3)

Left touchpad button

Functions like the left button on an external mouse.

Right touchpad button

Functions like the right button on an external mouse.

Lights

Identify the lights on the computer.

Table 2-5 Lights and their descriptions

Component

Description

Caps lock light

Mute light

Microphone mute light

Camera privacy light

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Power light

On: The computer is on.

On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital

letters.

On: Computer sound is off.

Off: Computer sound is on.

On: Microphone is off.

Off: Microphone is on.

On. The camera is off.

Off. The camera is on.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Blinking (select products only): The computer is in the

Sleep state, a power-saving state. The computer shuts off

power to the display and other unnecessary components.

Off: Depending on your computer model, the computer is

off, in Hibernation, or in Sleep. Hibernation is the power-

saving state that uses the least amount of power.

Keyboard area

9

Button, vents, and fingerprint reader

Identify the computer button, vents and fingerprint reader.

Fingerprint readers, which enable a fingerprint logon, can be located on the touchpad, on a side panel of the

computer, or on the top cover below the keyboard.

Table 2-6 Button, vents, and fingerprint reader and their descriptions

Component

Description

(1)

Vents

Enable airflow to cool internal components.

(2)

Power button

NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool

internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for

the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation.

●

●

●

●

When the computer is off, press the button briefly to turn

on the computer.

When the computer is on, press the button briefly to

initiate Sleep.

When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button

briefly to exit Sleep (select products only).

When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button

briefly to exit Hibernation.

IMPORTANT: Pressing and holding down the power button

results in the loss of unsaved information.

If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown

procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button

down for at least 10 seconds to turn off the computer.

To learn more about your power settings, see your power

options:

10

Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer

Table 2-6 Button, vents, and fingerprint reader and their descriptions (continued)

Component

Description

(3)

Fingerprint reader

▲ Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power

Options.

Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password

logon.

▲ Touch your finger to the fingerprint reader. See Using

Windows Hello (select products only) on page 41 for

details.

IMPORTANT: To prevent fingerprint logon issues, make

sure when you register your fingerprint that all sides of

your finger are registered by the fingerprint reader.

Special keys

Identify the special keys.

Table 2-7 Special keys and their descriptions

Component

Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

esc key

fn key

Action keys

Windows key

Opens the Start menu.

Displays system information when pressed in combination with

the fn key.

Executes specific functions when pressed in combination with

another key.

NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start

menu.

Execute frequently used system functions as defined by the icon

symbols on f1 through f12 function keys. See Action keys

on page 12.

Keyboard area

11

Table 2-7 Special keys and their descriptions (continued)

Component

Description

(5)

Fingerprint reader

Camera privacy key

Turns the camera off and on.

(6)

(7)

Power button

Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password

logon.

▲ Touch your finger to the fingerprint reader. See Using

Windows Hello (select products only) on page 41 for

details.

IMPORTANT: To prevent fingerprint logon issues, make

sure when you register your fingerprint that all sides of

your finger are registered by the fingerprint reader.

For more information, see Using the camera

NOTE:

on page 20.

●

●

●

●

When the computer is off, press the button briefly to turn

on the computer.

When the computer is on, press the button briefly to

initiate Sleep.

When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button

briefly to exit Sleep (select products only).

When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button

briefly to exit Hibernation.

IMPORTANT: Pressing and holding down the power button

results in the loss of unsaved information.

If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown

procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button

down for at least 10 seconds to turn off the computer.

To learn more about your power settings, see your power

options:

▲ Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power

Options.

Action keys

Identify the action keys.

The action keys execute frequently used system functions as defined by the icon symbols on f1 through f12.

The action keys vary by computer.

▲ To use an action key, press and hold the key.

NOTE: On some products, you must press the fn key in combination with the action key.

Table 2-8 Action keys and their descriptions

Icon

Description

Opens the “How to get help in Windows 10” webpage.

12

Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer

Table 2-8 Action keys and their descriptions (continued)

Icon

Description

Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key.

Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key.

Turns the keyboard backlight off or on. On select products, you can adjust the brightness of the keyboard

backlight. Press the key repeatedly to adjust the brightness from high (when you first start up the computer),

to low, to off. After you adjust the keyboard backlight setting, the backlight will revert to your previous

setting each time you turn on the computer. The keyboard backlight will turn off after 30 seconds of

inactivity. To turn the keyboard backlight back on, press any key or tap the touchpad (select products only).

To conserve battery power, turn off this feature.

Mutes or restores speaker sound.

Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key.

Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key.

Mutes the microphone.

Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a Blu-ray Disc (BD).

Starts, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD.

Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD.

Opens the HP Command Center app. This app allows you to adjust the temperature and cooling preferences

on your computer.

Rear

Identify the rear component.

Table 2-9 Rear component and its description

Component

Vents

Description

Enable airflow to cool internal components.

Rear

13

Table 2-9 Rear component and its description

Component

Description

NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal

components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to

cycle on and off during routine operation.

Bottom

Identify the bottom components.

Table 2-10 Bottom components and their descriptions

Component

(1)

(2)

Speakers (2)

Vent

Description

Produce sound.

Enables airflow to cool internal components.

NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool

internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal

for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine

operation.

Labels

The labels affixed to the computer provide information that you might need when you troubleshoot system

problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels can be in paper form or imprinted on the product.

IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the

computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a

tablet kickstand.

●

Service label—Provides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you

might be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this

information before you contact support.

14

Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer

Your service label will resemble one of the following examples. Refer to the illustration that most closely

matches the service label on your computer.

Table 2-11 Service label components

Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

HP product name

Model number

Warranty period

Product ID

Serial number

Table 2-12 Service label components

Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

HP product name

Product ID

Serial number

Warranty period

●

●

Regulatory label(s)—Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer.

Wireless certification label(s)—Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval

markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use.

Labels

15



 

 

3

Connecting to a network

●

●

●

●

●

Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access

information from millions of websites by using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection.

This chapter helps you get connected to that world.

Connecting to a wireless network

Your computer might be equipped with one or more wireless devices.

WLAN device—Connects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi

networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports,

restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. The WLAN device in your computer communicates

with a wireless router or a wireless access point.

HP Mobile Broadband Module—Gives you wireless connectivity over a wireless wide area network

(WWAN), a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone

towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions,

or even countries.

Bluetooth® device—Creates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled

devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device

communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close together—typically

within 10 m (approximately 33 ft) of each other.

Using the wireless controls

You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more features.

Airplane mode key (also called wireless button or wireless key)

Operating system controls

Airplane mode key

The computer might have an airplane mode key, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights.

All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory.

The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual

devices.

Operating system controls

The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and

diagnose and repair network problems.

To use operating system controls:

– or –

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings.

On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings.

16

Chapter 3 Connecting to a network

Connecting to a WLAN

Before you can connect to a WLAN with this procedure, you must first set up internet access.

NOTE: When you are setting up internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an

internet service provider (ISP). To purchase internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help

set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the internet

service.

Be sure that the WLAN device is on.

1.

2.

On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then connect to one of the available networks.

If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and

then select Next to complete the connection.

NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you might be out of range of a wireless router or access point.

NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN that you want to connect to:

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings.

‒ or –

On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings.

Under the Change your network settings section, select Network and Sharing Center.

Select Set up a new connection or network.

A list of options is displayed, which allows you to manually search for and connect to a network or to

create a new network connection.

3.

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection.

After the connection is made, right-click the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar to verify the

name and status of the connection.

NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router

manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors.

Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only)

Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer,

when used with a mobile operator’s network, gives you the freedom to connect to the internet, send email, or

connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots.

You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI number, MEID number, or both to activate mobile

broadband service. The number might be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside

the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display.

‒ or –

1.

2.

3.

On the taskbar, select the network status icon.

Select Network & Internet settings.

Under the Network & Internet section, select Cellular, and then select Advanced Options.

Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM) card. A SIM card

contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network

information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it

Connecting to a wireless network

17

might be included with the HP Mobile Broadband documents provided with your computer, or the mobile

network operator might provide it separately from the computer.

For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network

operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer.

Using eSIM (select products only)

Your computer might be equipped with an eSIM. An eSIM is a programmable version of the commonly used

SIM that you can use to download different profiles from selected carriers.

An eSIM lets you connect to the internet over a cellular data connection. With an eSIM, you do not need to get

a SIM card from your mobile operator, and you can quickly switch between mobile operators and data plans.

For example, you might have one cellular data plan for work and a different plan with another mobile

operator for personal use. If you travel, you can connect in more places by finding mobile operators with

plans in that area.

You can implement eSIMs in two ways:

The eSIM chip can be embedded (eUICC). The notebook then operates as a dual SIM, one as eUICC and the

second as standard micro or nano SIM card on a SIM card tray. Only one SIM can be active at a time.

A removable physical eSIM is placed on a SIM card tray like a standard micro or nano SIM card, but the

eSIM is not limited to a single carrier (physical blank eSIM).

You must add an eSIM profile to connect to the internet using cellular data. To add a profile, manage SIM

profiles, and learn how to use an eSIM, go to https://www.support.microsoft.com , and type Use an eSIM

in the search bar.

Using GPS (select products only)

Your computer might be equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver

location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems.

To enable GPS, be sure location is enabled under the Location setting.

▲ Type location in the taskbar search box, select Location privacy settings, and then select a setting.

Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only)

A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections

that traditionally link electronic devices.

Computers (desktop, notebook)

Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone)

Imaging devices (printer, camera)

Audio devices (headset, speakers)

Mouse

External keyboard

Connecting Bluetooth devices

Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection.

18

Chapter 3 Connecting to a network

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Type bluetooth in the taskbar search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings.

Enable Bluetooth, if it is not already enabled.

Select Add Bluetooth or other device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth.

Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device that you are adding,

NOTE:

follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more

information, see the documentation provided with the device.

If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some

NOTE:

devices might have additional requirements; see the documentation provided with the device.

Connecting to a wired network—LAN (select products only)

Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of

working wirelessly) or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office.

If there is no RJ-45 port on the computer, connecting to a LAN requires a network cable and a network jack or

an optional docking device or expansion product.

To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer.

Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router.

If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from

NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer.

Connecting to a wired network—LAN (select products only)

19

4

Enjoying entertainment features

Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the camera, enjoy and manage your music,

and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center,

connect external devices like a monitor, projector, TV, speakers, or headphones.

Using the camera

Your computer has one or more cameras that enable you to connect with others for work or play. Cameras can

be front facing, rear facing, or pop up.

To determine which camera or cameras are on your product, see Getting to know your computer on page 3.

Most cameras allow you to video chat, record video, and record still images. Some also provide HD (high-

definition) capability, apps for gaming, or facial recognition software like Windows Hello. See Securing your

computer and information on page 40 for details about using Windows Hello.

On select products, you can also enhance your camera privacy by turning the camera off. By default, the

camera is turned on. To turn off your camera, press the camera privacy key. The camera privacy light turns on.

To turn the camera back on, press the key again.

To use your camera, type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera from the list of

applications.

Using audio

Connecting speakers

You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or

mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on the computer (on select products)

or attach an external optical drive to play CDs. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio

devices such as speakers or headphones.

You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station.

To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect

high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 23. Before connecting

speakers, lower the volume setting.

Connecting headphones

You can connect wired headphones to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your

computer.

WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones,

earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental

Notices.

To access this document:

▲ Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Documentation.

20

Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features

To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions.

Connecting headsets

Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer.

WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones,

earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental

Notices.

To access this document:

▲ Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Documentation.

To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions.

Using sound settings

Sound settings

and then select Sound.

Audio settings

Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices.

To view or change sound settings, follow these steps.

▲ Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound,

Your computer might include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, B&O, or another provider. As a

result, your computer might include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control

panel specific to your sound system.

Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings.

▲ Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound,

and then select the audio control panel specific to your system.

Using video

Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite

websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a

network.

To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external

monitor, projector, or TV.

IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the

correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions.

For information about using your USB Type-C features, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the

instructions to find your product.

Connecting a Thunderbolt device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only)

To see video or high-resolution display output on an external Thunderbolt device, connect the Thunderbolt

device according to the instructions.

Using video

21

NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C Thunderbolt™ device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable,

purchased separately.

1.

Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C Thunderbolt port on the computer.

2.

3.

●

●

●

●

Connect the other end of the cable to the external Thunderbolt device.

Press the Windows key

+ p to cycle through one of four display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only.

Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device.

Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device.

Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only.

Each time you press the Windows key

+ p, the display state changes.

For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, increase the screen resolution of

NOTE:

the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under

Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes.

Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only)

HDMI (high-definition media interface) cables connect high-definition devices for enhanced audio and video.

Connecting a high-definition TV or monitor using HDMI

To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device

according to the instructions.

NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, purchased separately.

1.

Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer.

NOTE: HDMI port shape can vary by product.

22

Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor.

Press the Windows key

+ p to cycle through one of four display states:

●

●

●

●

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only.

Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device.

Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device.

Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only.

Each time you press the Windows key

+ p, the display state changes.

For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, increase the screen resolution of

NOTE:

the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under

Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes.

Setting up HDMI audio

Turn on HDMI audio

HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio.

After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following this procedure.

Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select

Playback devices.

On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device.

Select Set Default, and then select OK.

Return audio to computer speakers

Follow these steps to return the audio stream to the computer speakers.

Using video

23

Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select

Playback devices.

On the Playback tab, select Speakers.

Select Set Default, and then select OK.

Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select

products only)

Follow these steps to discover and connect to Miracast®-compatible wireless displays without leaving your

current apps.

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then select Project to a second screen.

Select Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

Using data transfer

Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies

from your USB devices to view on your computer.

To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB

device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer.

IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the

correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions.

For information about using your USB Type-C features, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the

instructions to find your product.

Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only)

To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately.

1.

Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the external device.

24

Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features

Depending on your computer model, you can navigate the computer screen using one or more methods.

5

Navigating the screen

Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen.

Use touch gestures on the touchpad.

Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately).

Use an on-screen keyboard.

Use a pointing stick.

Using touchpad and touch screen gestures

The touchpad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures.

You can also use the left and right touchpad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an

external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures

described in this chapter.

To customize gestures and see videos of how they work, type control panel in the taskbar search box,

select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse.

Some products include a precision touchpad, which provides enhanced gesture functionality. To determine if

you have a precision touchpad and find additional information, select Start, select Settings, select Devices,

and then select touchpad.

NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on both the touchpad and a touch screen.

Tap

Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the touchpad zone or touch screen to select the

item. Double-tap an item to open it.

Two-finger pinch zoom

Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text.

Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your

fingers together.

Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your

fingers apart.

25

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad)

Place two fingers slightly apart on the touchpad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right to move up,

down, or sideways on a page or image.

Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad)

Tap two fingers on the touchpad zone to open the options menu for the selected object.

NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with a mouse.

Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad)

By default, the three-finger tap opens the taskbar search box. Tap three fingers on the touchpad zone to

perform the gesture.

To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices,

and then select touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting.

26

Chapter 5 Navigating the screen

Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad)

By default, the four-finger tap opens the Action Center. Tap four fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the

gesture.

To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices,

and then select touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting.

Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad)

By default, the three-finger swipe switches between open apps and the desktop.

Swipe 3 fingers away from you to see all open windows.

Swipe 3 fingers toward you to show the desktop.

Swipe 3 fingers left or right to switch between open windows.

To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices,

and then select touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting.

Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad)

By default, the four-finger swipe switches between open desktops.

Swipe 4 fingers away from you to see all open windows.

Swipe 4 fingers toward you to show the desktop.

Swipe 4 fingers left or right to switch between desktops.

●

●

●

●

●

●

To change the function of this gesture, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select

touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting.

Using touchpad and touch screen gestures

27

One-finger slide (touch screen)

Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object.

●

●

To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move.

To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object.

Using an optional keyboard or mouse

An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as

you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific

functions.

Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only)

Select products have an on-screen keyboard.

1.

To display an on-screen keyboard, tap the keyboard icon in the notification area, at the far right of the

taskbar.

2.

Begin typing.

NOTE: Suggested words might be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it.

NOTE: Action keys and hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard.

28

Chapter 5 Navigating the screen

6 Managing power

Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on

battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor

and conserve the battery charge.

Some power management features described in this chapter might not be available on your computer.

Using Sleep and Hibernation

Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation.

IMPORTANT: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an

unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you

always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession.

This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer.

IMPORTANT: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback

functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external

media card.

Sleep—The Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to

memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more

information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 29.

Hibernation—The Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level or the

computer has been in the Sleep state for an extended period of time. In the Hibernation state, your work

is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually.

For more information, see Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) on page 30.

Initiating and exiting Sleep

You can initiate Sleep several ways.

Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep.

Close the display (select products only).

Press the Sleep hot key (select products only); for example, fn+f1or fn+f12.

Briefly press the power button (select products only).

You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button.

If the computer is closed, raise the display (select products only).

Press a key on the keyboard (select products only).

Tap the touchpad (select products only).

When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen.

If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows password

NOTE:

before your work returns to the screen.

29

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only)

You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power

Options.

Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options.

In the left pane, select Choose what the power buttons do (wording might vary by product).

Depending on your product, you can enable Hibernation for battery power or external power in any of

the following ways:

●

●

●

●

Power button—Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary by product),

select When I press the power button, and then select Hibernate.

Sleep button (select products only)—Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording

might vary by product), select When I press the sleep button, and then select Hibernate.

Lid (select products only)—Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording might vary

by product), select When I close the lid, and then select Hibernate.

Power menu—Select Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, under Shutdown

settings, select the Hibernate check box.

The Power menu can be accessed by selecting the Start button.

4.

Select Save changes.

To initiate Hibernation, use the method that you enabled in step 3.

To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button.

If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Windows

NOTE:

password before your work returns to the screen.

Shutting down (turning off) the computer

The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the

display and the computer.

IMPORTANT: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before

shutting down the computer.

Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended

period.

The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command.

If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly

NOTE:

pressing the power button.

Save your work and close all open programs.

Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down.

If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the

following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down.

Press and hold the power button for at least 10 seconds.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

●

●

30

Chapter 6 Managing power

●

If your computer has a user-replaceable battery (select products only), disconnect the computer from

external power, and then remove the battery.

Using the Power icon and Power Options

Different Power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the

mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level.

The Power icon

is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power

settings and view the remaining battery charge.

To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

.

To use Power Options, right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options.

●

●

Running on battery power

When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the

computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in

the computer slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical

battery level.

WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a

replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP.

Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer,

screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors.

NOTE: Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge.

Using HP Fast Charge (select products only)

The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. The charging time might vary

by ± 10%. When the remaining battery charge is between 0 and 50%, the battery will charge to 50% of full

capacity in no more than 30 to 45 minutes, depending on your computer model.

To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to

external power.

Displaying battery charge

When you are using your computer while running on battery power only, periodically check the battery

charge.

To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

.

Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only)

You can access battery information in several ways.

Using the Power icon and Power Options

31

1.

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

– or –

Select the question mark icon in the taskbar.

2.

Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP

Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support.

HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

HP Battery Check

Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity

Conserving battery power

Be sure to conserve battery power and maximize battery life.

Lower the brightness of the display.

Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them.

Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an

external hard drive connected to a USB port.

Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using.

Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer.

Identifying low battery levels

When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the

battery light and power icon indicate a low battery level.

●

The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level.

– or –

NOTE:

on page 31.

●

The Power icon

shows a low or critical battery notification.

For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon and Power Options

The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in

the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information.

If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates

Hibernation.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Resolving a low battery level

You can quickly resolve low battery level conditions.

Resolving a low battery level when external power is available

Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power.

32

Chapter 6 Managing power

AC adapter

Optional docking device or expansion product

Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP

Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available

Save your work and shut down the computer.

Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation

Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power.

Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button.

Factory-sealed battery

When the battery level is low and you cannot bring the computer out of Hibernation, connect the AC adapter.

To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run HP Battery Check in

the HP Support Assistant app (select products only).

1.

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

– or –

Select the question mark icon in the taskbar.

2.

Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP

Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support.

The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the

battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support.

Running on external power

For information about connecting to external power, see the Setup Instructions poster provided in the

computer box.

The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to external power with an

approved AC adapter or an optional docking device or expansion product.

WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a

replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP.

WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft.

Connect the computer to external power under any of the following conditions:

When charging or calibrating a battery

When installing or updating system software

When updating the system BIOS

When writing information to a disc (select products only)

When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives

When performing a backup or recovery

●

●

●

1.

2.

●

●

●

●

●

●

Running on external power

33

When you connect the computer to external power:

The battery begins to charge.

The Power icon

changes appearance.

When you disconnect external power:

The computer switches to battery power.

The Power icon

changes appearance.

●

●

●

●

34

Chapter 6 Managing power

7 Maintaining your computer

Performing regular maintenance keeps your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use

tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and

drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer.

Improving performance

Using Disk Defragmenter

You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such

as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup.

HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month.

NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives.

To run Disk Defragmenter:

Connect the computer to AC power.

Type defragment in the taskbar search box, and then select Defragment and Optimize Drives.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help.

Using Disk Cleanup

Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space

and help the computer run more efficiently.

To run Disk Cleanup:

Type disk in the taskbar search box, and then select Disk Cleanup.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only)

HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under some conditions.

You drop the computer.

You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power.

A short time after one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation.

NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional

docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard.

NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these

drives.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

●

●

Improving performance

35

Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status

The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay, the

secondary hard drive bay (select products only), or both are parked.

Updating programs and drivers

HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues

and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not

work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you do not get the most out of

your equipment.

To update programs and drivers, choose one of the following methods:

Updating programs and drivers using Windows 10 on page 36

Updating programs using Windows 10 S on page 36

Updating drivers using Windows 10 S on page 36

Updating programs and drivers using Windows 10

Use this procedure to update programs and drivers.

1.

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

Select My notebook, select the Updates tab, and then select Check for updates and messages.

‒ or –

Select the question mark icon in the taskbar.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

Updating programs using Windows 10 S

Use this procedure to update programs.

Select Start, and then select Microsoft Store.

Select your account profile picture next to the search box, and then select Downloads and updates.

On the Downloads and updates page, make the selection for updates and follow the on-screen

instructions.

Updating drivers using Windows 10 S

Use this procedure to update drivers.

1.

Type windows update settings in the taskbar search box, and then select Windows Update

settings.

2.

Select Check for updates.

NOTE:

instructions.

If Windows does not find a new driver, go to the device manufacturer's website, and follow the

●

●

●

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

36

Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer

Cleaning your computer

Cleaning your computer regularly removes dirt and debris so that your device continues to operate at its best.

Use the following information to safely clean the external surfaces of your computer.

Enabling HP Easy Clean (select products only)

HP Easy Clean helps you to avoid accidental input while you clean the computer surfaces. This software

disables devices such as the keyboard, touch screen, and touchpad for a preset amount of time so that you

can clean all computer surfaces.

1.

Start HP Easy Clean in one of the following ways:

Select the Start menu, and then select HP Easy Clean.

●

●

●

– or –

– or –

Select the HP Easy Clean icon in the taskbar.

Select Start, and then select the HP Easy Clean tile.

2.

Now that your device is disabled for a short period, see Removing dirt and debris from your computer

on page 37 for the recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer.

After you remove the dirt and debris, you can also clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. See Cleaning

your computer with a disinfectant on page 38 for guidelines to help prevent the spread of harmful

bacteria and viruses.

Removing dirt and debris from your computer

Here are the recommended steps to clean dirt and debris from your computer.

For computers with wood veneer, see Caring for wood veneer (select products only) on page 38.

1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the

surfaces.

2.

Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any

installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards.

CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned

on or plugged in.

3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with water. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet.

IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels.

4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth.

IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid

makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly

on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen

peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish.

5.

6.

7.

Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the

display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables.

Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning.

Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves.

Cleaning your computer

37

See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 38 for recommended steps to clean the high-touch,

external surfaces on your computer to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses.

Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant

The World Health Organization (WHO) recommends cleaning surfaces, followed by disinfection, as a best

practice for preventing the spread of viral respiratory illnesses and harmful bacteria.

After cleaning the external surfaces of your computer using the steps in Removing dirt and debris from your

computer on page 37, Caring for wood veneer (select products only) on page 38, or both, you might also

choose to clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. A disinfectant that is within HP’s cleaning guidelines is an

alcohol solution consisting of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. This solution is also known as rubbing

alcohol and is sold in most stores.

Follow these steps when disinfecting high-touch, external surfaces on your computer:

1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the

surfaces.

2.

Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any

installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards.

CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned

on or plugged in.

3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with a mixture of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. The cloth should be

moist, but not dripping wet.

CAUTION: Do not use any of the following chemicals or any solutions that contain them, including

spray-based surface cleaners: bleach, peroxides (including hydrogen peroxide), acetone, ammonia, ethyl

alcohol, methylene chloride, or any petroleum-based materials, such as gasoline, paint thinner,

benzene, or toluene.

IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels.

4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth.

IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid

makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly

on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen

peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish.

Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the

display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables.

Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning.

Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves.

Caring for wood veneer (select products only)

Your product might feature high-quality wood veneer. As with all natural wood products, proper care is

important for best results over the life of the product. Because of the nature of natural wood, you might see

unique variations in the grain pattern or subtle variations in color, which are normal.

Clean the wood with a dry, static-free microfiber cloth or chamois.

Avoid cleaning products containing substances such as ammonia, methylene chloride, acetone,

turpentine, or other petroleum-based solvents.

38

Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer

5.

6.

7.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

–

–

–

–

–

–

Do not expose the wood to sun or moisture for long periods of time.

If the wood becomes wet, dry it by dabbing with an absorbent, lint-free cloth.

Avoid contact with any substance that might dye or discolor the wood.

Avoid contact with sharp objects or rough surfaces that might scratch the wood.

See Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 37 for the recommended steps to clean the high-

touch, external surfaces on your computer. After you remove the dirt and debris, you can also clean the

surfaces with a disinfectant. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 38 for sanitizing

guidelines to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses.

Traveling with or shipping your computer

If you must travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe.

●

Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive.

Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards.

Turn off and then disconnect all external devices.

Shut down the computer.

Take a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer.

When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it with the rest of your luggage.

IMPORTANT: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include

airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices

that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives.

If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when

you can use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline.

If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package

“FRAGILE.”

The use of wireless devices might be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions might apply

aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the

policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your

computer before you turn it on.

●

If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary.

Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the

computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary.

WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt

to run the computer from a voltage converter kit that is sold for appliances.

Traveling with or shipping your computer

39

8

Securing your computer and information

Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your

information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the

Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks,

such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code.

NOTE: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer.

Using passwords

A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect

online transactions. You can set several types of passwords. For example, when you set up your computer for

the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. You can set additional

passwords in Windows or in HP Setup Utility (BIOS), which is preinstalled on your computer.

You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security

feature.

To create and save passwords, use the following tips:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure

place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer.

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program.

Change your passwords at least every 3 months.

An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers.

Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove

all password settings.

NOTE:

For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords:

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

●

●

●

●

●

– or –

Select the question mark icon in the taskbar.

Setting Windows passwords

Windows passwords can help protect your computer from unauthorized access.

Table 8-1 Types of Windows passwords and their functions

Password

Function

User password

Protects access to a Windows user account.

Administrator password

Protects administrator-level access to computer contents.

NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility (BIOS) contents.

40

Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information

Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords

BIOS passwords provide additional layers of security for your computer.

Table 8-2 Types of BIOS passwords and their functions

Password

Function

Administrator password

Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility (BIOS).

If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS).

Power-on password

Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer.

If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer.

●

●

●

●

To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

IMPORTANT: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the

computer from operating properly.

1.

Start Setup Utility (BIOS):

●

Computers or tablets with keyboards:

▲ Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10.

●

Tablets without keyboards:

1.

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume up button.

- or -

- or -

2.

Tap f10.

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button.

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button.

2.

Select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

To save your changes, select Exit, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes.

NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter.

Your changes take effect when the computer restarts.

Using Windows Hello (select products only)

On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, Windows Hello allows you to enroll

your fingerprint, your facial ID, and set up a PIN. After enrollment, you can use your fingerprint reader, facial

ID, or PIN to sign in to Windows.

To set up Windows Hello:

1.

2.

Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options.

To add a password, select Password, and then select Add.

Using Windows Hello (select products only)

41

3.

4.

Under Windows Hello Fingerprint or Windows Hello Face, select Set up.

Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enroll your fingerprint or facial ID and

set up a PIN.

IMPORTANT: To prevent fingerprint logon issues, be sure when you register your fingerprint that all

sides of your finger are registered by the fingerprint reader.

NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length. The default setting is for numbers only. To include alphabetic or

special characters, select the include letters and symbols check box.

Using internet security software

When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the internet, you potentially expose your

computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, internet

security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial

offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security

software must be kept up to date. HP strongly recommends that you upgrade the security software trial offer

or purchase the software of your choice to fully protect your computer.

Using antivirus software

Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function

abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage

that they cause.

To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date.

An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. HP strongly recommends that you use the

antivirus program of your choice to fully protect your computer.

For more information about computer viruses, type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the

HP Support Assistant app.

– or –

●

●

Select the question mark icon in the taskbar.

Using firewall software

Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you

install on your computer, network, or both, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software.

There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewalls—Software that protects only the computer it is installed on.

Network-based firewalls—Installed between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to

protect all the computers on the network.

When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with

a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked.

Installing software updates

HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct

security problems and improve software performance.

42

Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information

IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates.

To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as

soon as you receive an alert.

You can install these updates automatically.

To view or change the settings:

1.

2.

3.

Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security.

Select Windows Update, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced options, and then follow the on-screen

instructions.

Using HP Device as a Service (select products only)

HP DaaS is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company

assets.

HP DaaS helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and helps reduce

time spent solving device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is

highly cost-effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. For more information, go to

https://www.hptouchpointmanager.com/.

Securing your wireless network

When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network

from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide

any security.

Backing up your software applications and information

Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or

damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure.

Using an optional security cable (select products only)

A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer

from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device

manufacturer's instructions.

Using HP Device as a Service (select products only)

43

9

Using Setup Utility (BIOS)

Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output

devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS)

includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of

system and extended memory.

NOTE: To start Setup Utility on convertible computers, your computer must be in notebook mode and you

must use the keyboard attached to your notebook.

Starting Setup Utility (BIOS)

You have several ways to access the Setup Utility (BIOS).

IMPORTANT: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the

computer from operating properly.

▲ Turn on or restart the computer and quickly press f10.

– or –

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10 when the Start menu is displayed.

Updating Setup Utility (BIOS)

Updated versions of Setup Utility (BIOS) might be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP

website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named

Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file.

Determining the BIOS version

To decide whether you need to update Setup Utility (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer.

To reveal the BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS), use one of these options.

●

HP Support Assistant

– or –

1.

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

Select the question mark icon in the taskbar.

2.

Select My notebook, and then select Specifications.

●

Setup Utility (BIOS)

1.

2.

3.

Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 44).

Select Main, and then make note of the BIOS version.

Select Exit, select one of the options, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

●

In Windows, press ctrl+alt+s.

To check for later BIOS versions, see Preparing for a BIOS update on page 45.

44

Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS)

Preparing for a BIOS update

Be sure to follow all prerequisites before downloading and installing a BIOS update.

IMPORTANT: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and

install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do

not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional

docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these

instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet.

Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep.

Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord.

If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any

NOTE:

software updates, especially system BIOS updates.

Downloading a BIOS update

After you review the prerequisites, you can check for and download BIOS updates.

1.

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

– or –

Select the question mark icon in the taskbar.

Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

At the download area, follow these steps:

a.

Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your

computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS version, make a note of the date, name, or

other identifier. You might need this information to locate the update later, after it has been

downloaded to your hard drive.

b.

Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive.

Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded.

You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update.

Installing a BIOS update

BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that appear on the screen after the download is

complete. If no instructions appear, follow these steps.

Type file in the taskbar search box, and then select File Explorer.

Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:).

Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update.

Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe).

The BIOS installation begins.

5.

Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions.

●

●

●

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Updating Setup Utility (BIOS)

45

NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file

from your hard drive.

46

Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS)

10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

You can use the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics utility to determine whether your computer hardware is running

properly. The three versions are HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI

(Unified Extensible Firmware Interface), and (for select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

UEFI, a firmware feature.

Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products

only)

HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is a Windows-based utility that allows you to run diagnostic tests to

determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs within the Windows

operating system to diagnose hardware failures.

If HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is not installed on your computer, first you must download and install

it. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

Windows on page 48.

Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code

When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit

Failure ID code is generated.

▲ Depending on the instructions on the screen, choose one of these options:

●

●

If failure ID link is displayed, select the link and follow the on-screen instructions.

If instructions for calling support are displayed. Follow those instructions.

Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows

After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, you can access it from HP Help and Support, HP

Support Assistant, or the Start menu.

Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support (select products only)

After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Help and

Support.

1.

2.

Select the Start button, and then select HP Help and Support.

Select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows.

3. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-

screen instructions.

NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel.

Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from Support Assistant

After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Support

Assistant.

Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only)

47

1.

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

– or –

Select the question mark icon in the taskbar.

Select Troubleshooting and fixes.

Select Diagnostics, and then select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows.

4. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-

screen instructions.

NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel.

Accessing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Start menu (select products only)

After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from the Start menu.

Select the Start button.

Right-click HP PC Hardware Diagnostics for Windows, select More, and then select Run as

administrator.

3. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test that you want to run, and then follow the on-

screen instructions.

NOTE: To stop a diagnostic test, select Cancel.

Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows

The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows downloading instructions are provided in English only. You must

use a Windows computer to download this tool because only .exe files are provided.

Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version from HP

To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP, follow these steps.

Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed.

Select Download HP Diagnostics Windows, and then select a location on your computer or a USB flash

drive.

The tool downloads to the selected location.

Downloading the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store

You can download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from the Microsoft Store.

Select the Microsoft Store app on your desktop or enter Microsoft Store in the taskbar search box.

Enter HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows in the Microsoft Store search box.

2.

3.

1.

2.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

Follow the on-screen directions.

The tool downloads to the selected location.

Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products

only)

You can download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number.

48

Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

For some products, you might have to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the

NOTE:

product name or number.

1.

2.

3.

Go to http://www.hp.com/support.

Select Software and Drivers, select your type of product, and then enter the product name or number in

the search box that is displayed.

In the Diagnostics section, select Download, and then follow the on-screen instructions to select the

specific Windows diagnostics version to be downloaded to your computer or USB flash drive.

The tool downloads to the selected location.

Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows

To install HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, navigate to the folder on your computer or the USB flash

drive where the .exe file downloaded, double-click the .exe file, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI

HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to

determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating

system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other

software components.

NOTE:

For Windows 10 S computers, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download

and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see

Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 50.

If your PC does not start in Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware

issues.

Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI hardware failure ID code

When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit

Failure ID code is generated.

For assistance in solving the problem:

▲ Select Contact HP, accept the HP privacy disclaimer, and then use a mobile device to scan the Failure ID

code that appears on the next screen. The HP Customer Support - Service Center page appears with your

Failure ID and product number automatically filled in. Follow the on-screen instructions.

– or –

Contact support, and provide the Failure ID code.

NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode, and you

must use the attached keyboard.

NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc.

Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI

To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow this procedure.

Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI

49

Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc.

1.

2.

Press f2.

The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a.

Connected USB flash drive

NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see

Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 50.

b.

c.

Hard drive

BIOS

3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run,

and then follow the on-screen instructions.

Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive

Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in some situations.

HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstallation image.

HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition.

The hard drive is damaged.

NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading instructions are provided in English only, and you

must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe

files are provided.

Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version

To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive, follow this procedure.

Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed.

Select Download HP Diagnostics UEFI, and then select Run.

Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products

only)

You can download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) to a

USB flash drive.

For some products, you might have to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the

NOTE:

product name or number.

Go to http://www.hp.com/support.

Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system.

In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI

Diagnostics version for your computer.

●

●

●

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

50

Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select

products only)

Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is a firmware (BIOS) feature that downloads HP PC Hardware

Diagnostics UEFI to your computer. It can then execute the diagnostics on your computer, and it might upload

results to a preconfigured server.

For more information about Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, go to http://www.hp.com/go/

techcenter/pcdiags, and then select Find out more.

Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI

HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is also available as a SoftPaq that you can download to a server.

Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version

You can download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive.

Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed.

Select Download Remote Diagnostics, and then select Run.

Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number

You can download HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number.

NOTE:

For some products, you might have to download the software by using the product name or number.

Go to http://www.hp.com/support.

Select Software and Drivers, select your type of product, enter the product name or number in the

search box that is displayed, select your computer, and then select your operating system.

In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the Remote UEFI

version for the product.

Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings

Using the Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics setting in Computer Setup (BIOS), you can perform several

customizations.

Set a schedule for running diagnostics unattended. You can also start diagnostics immediately in

interactive mode by selecting Execute Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics.

Set the location for downloading the diagnostic tools. This feature provides access to the tools from the

HP website or from a server that has been preconfigured for use. Your computer does not require the

traditional local storage (such as a hard drive or USB flash drive) to run remote diagnostics.

Set a location for storing the test results. You can also set the user name and password that you use for

uploads.

Display status information about the diagnostics run previously.

To customize Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings, follow these steps:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup.

Select Advanced, and then select Settings.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

●

●

●

●

1.

2.

Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only)

51

3. Make your customization selections.

4.

Select Main, and then Save Changes and Exit to save your settings.

Your changes take effect when the computer restarts.

52

Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering

You can use Windows tools or HP software to back up your information, create a restore point, reset your

computer, create recovery media, or restore your computer to its factory state. Performing these standard

procedures can return your computer to a working state faster.

IMPORTANT:

70% charged before you start the recovery process.

If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least

IMPORTANT:

beginning any recovery process.

For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before

Backing up information and creating recovery media

These methods of creating recovery media and backups are available on select products only.

Using Windows tools for backing up

HP recommends that you back up your information immediately after initial setup. You can do this task either

using Windows Backup locally with an external USB drive or using online tools.

IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule

regular backups to avoid information loss.

NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft® System Restore is disabled by default.

Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select

products only)

You can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create HP Recovery media on a bootable USB flash drive.

For details:

▲ Go to http://www.hp.com/support, search for HP Cloud Recovery, and then select the result that

matches the type of computer that you have.

If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to

NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

IMPORTANT: HP recommends that you follow the Restoring and recovery methods on page 54 to restore

your computer before you obtain and use the HP recovery discs. Using a recent backup can return your

machine to a working state sooner than using the HP recovery discs. After the system is restored, reinstalling

all the operating system software released since your initial purchase can be a lengthy process.

Restoring and recovering your system

You have several tools available to recover your system both within and outside of Windows if the desktop

cannot load.

HP recommends that you attempt to restore your system using the Restoring and recovery methods

on page 54.

53

Creating a system restore

System Restore is available in Windows. The System Restore software can automatically or manually create

restore points, or snapshots, of the system files and settings on the computer at a particular point.

When you use System Restore, it returns your computer to its state at the time you made the restore point.

Your personal files and documents should not be affected.

Restoring and recovery methods

After you run the first method, test to see whether the issue still exists before you proceed to the next

method, which might now be unnecessary.

1.

2.

Run a Microsoft System Restore.

Run Reset this PC.

NOTE: The options Remove everything and then Fully clean the drive can take several hours to

complete and leave no information on your computer. It is the safest way to reset your computer before

you recycle it.

3.

Recover using HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery media

on page 54.

For more information about the first two methods, see the Get Help app:

Select the Start button, select the Get Help app, and then enter the task you want to perform.

NOTE: You must be connected to the internet to access the Get Help app.

Recovering using HP Recovery media

You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original operating system and software programs that were

installed at the factory. On select products, it can be created on a bootable USB flash drive using the HP Cloud

Recovery Download Tool.

For details, see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media (select products only)

on page 53.

If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to

NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

To recover your system:

▲ Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer.

NOTE: HP recommends that you follow the Restoring and recovery methods on page 54 to restore your

computer before you obtain and use the HP recovery discs. Using a recent backup can return your machine to

a working state sooner than using the HP recovery discs. After the system is restored, reinstalling all the

operating system software released since your initial purchase can be a lengthy process.

Changing the computer boot order

If your computer does not restart using the HP Recovery media, you can change the computer boot order, the

order of devices listed in BIOS for startup information. You can select an optical drive or a USB flash drive,

depending on the location of your HP Recovery media.

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps.

For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before

54

Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering

To change the boot order:

1.

2.

Insert the HP Recovery media.

Access the system Startup menu.

For computers or tablets with keyboards attached, turn on or restart the computer or tablet,

quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options.

For tablets without keyboards, turn on or restart the tablet, quickly press and hold the volume up

button, and then select f9.

●

●

‒ or –

Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly press and hold the volume down button, and then select f9.

3.

Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot, and then follow the on-screen

instructions.

Using HP Sure Recover (select products only)

Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Recover, a PC operating system (OS) recovery solution

built into the hardware and software. HP Sure Recover can fully restore the HP OS image without installed

recovery software.

Using HP Sure Recover, an administrator or user can restore the system and install:

●

●

●

Latest version of the operating system

Platform-specific device drivers

Software applications, in the case of a custom image

To access the latest documentation for HP Sure Recover, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Follow the on-

screen instructions to find your product and locate your documentation.

Restoring and recovering your system 55

12 Electrostatic discharge

Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contact—for example,

the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob.

A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic

components.

IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these

precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly

grounded.

Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them.

Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible.

Use nonmagnetic tools.

Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface.

If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container.

●

●

●

●

●

●

56

Chapter 12 Electrostatic discharge

13 Specifications

When you travel with or store your computer, the input power ratings and operating specifications provide

helpful information.

Input power

The power information in this section might be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer.

The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power

source must be rated at 100 V–240 V, 50 Hz–60 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a

standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source that is

supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer.

The computer can operate on DC power within one or more of the following specifications. Operating voltage

and current varies by platform. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label.

Table 13-1 DC power specifications

Input power

Rating

Operating voltage and current

5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A – 45 W USB-C®

5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A – 45 W USB-C

5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A / 15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A

– 45 W USB-C

5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A – 65 W USB-C

5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A –

65 W USB-C

5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A – 90 W

USB-C

19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A – 45 W

19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A – 65 W

19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A – 90 W

19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A – 120 W

19.5 V dc @ 6.9 A – 135 W

19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A – 150 W

19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A – 200 W

19.5 V dc @ 11.8 A – 230 W

19.5 V dc @ 16.92 A – 330 W

DC plug of external HP power

supply (select products only)

Input power

57

NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding

240 V rms.

Operating environment

Use the operating specifications for helpful information when you travel with or store your computer.

Table 13-2 Operating environment specifications

Metric

U.S.

Factor

Temperature

Operating

Nonoperating

Operating

Nonoperating

Operating

Nonoperating

Relative humidity (noncondensing)

Maximum altitude (unpressurized)

5°C to 35°C

–20°C to 60°C

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41°F to 95°F

–4°F to 140°F

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

–15 m to 3,048 m

–15 m to 12,192 m

–50 ft to 10,000 ft

–50 ft to 40,000 ft

58

Chapter 13 Specifications

14 Accessibility

HP's goal is to design, produce, and market products, services, and information that everyone everywhere can

use, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate third-party assistive technology (AT) devices or

applications.

HP and accessibility

Because HP works to weave diversity, inclusion, and work/life into the fabric of the company, it is reflected in

everything HP does. HP strives to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power

of technology throughout the world.

Finding the technology tools you need

Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create

independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and

improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology.

For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 60.

The HP commitment

HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This

commitment supports the company's diversity objectives and helps ensure that the benefits of technology

are available to all.

The HP accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used

by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive

devices.

To achieve that goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide HP actions. All HP

managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance

with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within HP, and provide employees with the training

they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services.

Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups

accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically

feasible.

Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines and in the design and

testing of products and services.

Document accessibility features, and make information about HP products and services publicly

available in an accessible form.

Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers.

Support internal and external research and development that improves assistive technology relevant to

HP products and services.

Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility.

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

HP and accessibility

59

International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP)

IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking,

education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their

careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure.

As a founding member, HP joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility.

This commitment supports HP’s accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and

services that people with disabilities can effectively use.

IAAP will make the profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn

from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join

the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options.

Finding the best assistive technology

Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate,

express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility

awareness within HP and with our customers and partners.

Whether it’s large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or

any other assistive technology to help with your specific situation—a variety of assistive technologies make

HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs

Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create

independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain,

and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology.

You can choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products,

answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that

professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in

physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others,

while not certified or licensed, can also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the

individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs.

Accessibility for HP products

These links provide information about accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable, included

in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and

products most appropriate for your situation.

●

●

●

HP Aging & Accessibility: Go to http://www.hp.com, type Accessibility in the search box. Select

Office of Aging and Accessibility.

HP computers: For Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows 10, go to http://www.hp.com/support, type

Windows Accessibility Options in the Search our knowledge search box. Select the

appropriate operating system in the results.

HP Shopping, peripherals for HP products: Go to http://store.hp.com, select Shop, and then select

Monitors or Accessories.

If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support

on page 63.

Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

60

Chapter 14 Accessibility

Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Microsoft Office)

Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps)

Standards and legislation

Countries worldwide are enacting regulations to improve access to products and services for persons with

disabilities. These regulations are historically applicable to telecommunications products and services, PCs

and printers with certain communications and video playback features, their associated user documentation,

and their customer support.

Standards

The US Access Board created Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards to address

access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive

disabilities.

The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance-

based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover

software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers,

telecommunications products, video and multimedia, and self-contained closed products.

Mandate 376 – EN 301 549

The European Union created the EN 301 549 standard within Mandate 376 as an online toolkit for public

procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products

and services, with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each requirement.

Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG)

Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web

designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related

limitations.

WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web

applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers

flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012.

WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory,

physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0

provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of

presentation, and color contrast)

Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and

navigability)

Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance)

Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies)

●

●

●

●

●

●

Legislation and regulations

Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. These links

provide information about key legislation, regulations, and standards.

Standards and legislation

61

United States

Canada

Europe

Australia

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Useful accessibility resources and links

These organizations, institutions, and resources might be good sources of information about disabilities and

age-related limitations.

NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP

assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you encounter on the internet. Listing on this page does

not imply endorsement by HP.

Organizations

These organizations are a few of the many that provide information about disabilities and age-related

limitations.

American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD)

The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP)

Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA)

Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC)

Lighthouse International

National Association of the Deaf

National Federation of the Blind

Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA)

Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI)

W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI)

Educational institutions

Many educational institutions, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age-

related limitations.

California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN)

University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center

University of Minnesota computer accommodations program

Other disability resources

Many resources, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations.

ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program

ILO Global Business and Disability network

EnableMart

62

Chapter 14 Accessibility

European Disability Forum

Job Accommodation Network

Microsoft Enable

HP links

HP comfort and safety guide

HP public sector sales

Contacting support

●

●

●

●

●

These HP-specific links provide information that relates to disabilities and age-related limitations.

HP offers technical support and assistance with accessibility options for customers with disabilities.

NOTE: Support is in English only.

Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing who have questions about technical support or accessibility

of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain

Time.

Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support

or accessibility of HP products, choose one of the following options:

Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time.

Complete the Contact form for people with disabilities or age-related limitations.

–

–

–

Contacting support

63

Index

A

AC adapter and battery light,

identifying 4, 5

accessibility 59, 60, 61, 63

accessibility needs assessment 60

action key, identifying 11

action keys

B

backing up software and

information 43

backup, creating 53

backups 53

battery

conserving power 32

discharging 32

factory-sealed 33

finding information 31

low battery levels 32

resolving low battery level 32,

33

battery charge 31

battery information, finding 31

battery power 31

best practices 1

BIOS

determining version 44

downloading an update 45

starting the Setup Utility 44

updating 44

Bluetooth device 16, 18

Bluetooth label 14

boot order, changing 54

bottom components 14

buttons

left touchpad 8, 9

power 10, 12

right touchpad 8, 9

C

camera

identifying 7

using 20

camera light, identifying 7

camera privacy key, identifying 12

camera privacy key, using 20

camera privacy light, identifying 9

caps lock light 9

caring for your computer 37

cleaning your computer 37

caring for wood veneer 38

disinfecting 38

decrease screen brightness 13

help 12

HP Command Center app 13

identifying 12

increase screen brightness 13

keyboard backlight 13

mute microphone 13

mute volume

mute 13

next track 13

pause 13

play 13

previous track 13

speaker volume 13

using 12

volume

mute 13

airplane mode 16

airplane mode key 16

antivirus software, using 42

assistive technology (AT)

finding 60

purpose 59

AT (assistive technology)

finding 60

purpose 59

audio 20

adjusting volume 13

HDMI audio 23

headphones 20

headsets 21

sound settings 21

speakers 20

audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack,

identifying 5

64

Index

HP Easy Clean 37

removing dirt and debris 37

components

bottom 14

display 6

keyboard area 7

left side 4

lights 9

rear 13

right side 3

touchpad 7, 8

connecting to a network 16

connecting to a wireless network 16

connecting to a WLAN 17

connecting to LAN 19

connectors

power 4, 6

control zone 8

corporate WLAN connection 17

critical battery level 32

customer support, accessibility 63

D

data transfer 24

decrease screen brightness action

key 13

Disk Cleanup software 35

Disk Defragmenter software 35

display components 6

display states 21, 22

E

electrostatic discharge 56

esc key, identifying 11

eSIM 18

external power, using 33

F

factory-sealed battery 33

fingerprint reader 11, 12

fingerprints, registering 41

firewall software 42

fn key, identifying 11

four-finger swipe touchpad gesture

27

four-finger tap touchpad gesture

increase screen brightness action

27

key 13

initiating Sleep and Hibernation 29

input power 57

installing

optional security cable 43

internal microphones, identifying 7

International Association of

Accessibility Professionals 60

internet security software, using 42

J

jacks

audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 5

K

keyboard and optional mouse

using 28

keyboard backlight action key 13

keys

action 11

camera privacy 12

esc 11

fn 11

Windows 11

L

labels

Bluetooth 14

regulatory 14

serial number 14

service 14

wireless certification 14

WLAN 14

left control zone, identifying 8

left side components 4

lights

AC adapter and battery 4, 5

camera 7

camera privacy 9

caps lock 9

microphone mute 9

mute 9

power 9

touchpad 8

low battery level 32

low blue light mode 6

M

magnetic pen attachment area,

identifying 3

maintenance

Disk Cleanup 35

Disk Defragmenter 35

updating programs and drivers

managing power 29

MEID number 17

microphone mute light, identifying

36

9

Miracast 24

mobile broadband

activating 17

IMEI number 17

MEID number 17

mute light, identifying 9

mute microphone action key 13

mute volume action key 13

N

navigating the screen 25

next track action key 13

O

on-screen keyboard 28

one-finger slide touch screen

gesture 28

operating environment 58

operating system controls 16

P

passwords

Setup Utility (BIOS) 41

Windows 40

pause action key 13

pen attachment area, identifying 3

play action key 13

ports

HDMI 5, 22

USB SuperSpeed 4

USB SuperSpeed port with HP

Sleep and Charge 4

USB Type-C 24

USB Type-C power connector and

SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep

and Charge 5

G

gestures 25

Get Help in Windows 10 action key

12

GPS 18

H

hardware, locating 3

HDMI port

connecting 22

identifying 5

headphones, connecting 20

headsets, connecting 21

Hibernation

exiting 30

initiated during critical battery

level 32

initiating 30

high-definition devices, connecting

HP 3D DriveGuard 35

HP Assistive Policy 59

HP Command Center app action key

22, 24

13

HP Device as a Service (HP DaaS) 43

HP Fast Charge 31

HP Mobile Broadband

activating 17

IMEI number 17

MEID number 17

HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI

downloading 50

starting 49

using 49

HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows

accessing 47, 48

downloading 48

installing 49

using 47

HP Recovery media

recovery 54

HP resources 1

HP Sure Recover 55

HP Touchpoint Manager 43

I

IMEI number 17

Index

65

USB Type-C Thunderbolt 21

Section 508 accessibility standards

touchpad

USB Type-C power connector and

Thunderbolt port with HP Sleep

and Charge 6

power

battery 31

external 33

power button, identifying 10, 12

power connector

identifying 4, 5, 6

Power icon, using 31

power light, identifying 9

power settings, using 31

precision touchpad

using 25

precision touchpad gestures

four-finger swipe 27

four-finger tap 27

three-finger swipe 27

three-finger tap 26

two-finger slide 26

two-finger tap 26

previous track action key 13

product name and number,

computer 14

public WLAN connection 17

R

rear components 13

recovery 53

discs 54

media 54

USB flash drive 54

recovery media 53

creating using HP Cloud Recovery

Download Tool 53

creating using Windows tools 53

regulatory information

regulatory label 14

wireless certification labels 14

Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

UEFI settings

customizing 51

using 51

S

screen

61

navigating 25

security cable, installing 43

serial number, computer 14

service labels, locating 14

Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 41

shipping the computer 39

shutdown 30

Sleep

exiting 29

initiating 29

Sleep and Hibernation, initiating 29

slots

memory card reader 3

microSD memory card reader 3

software

Disk Cleanup 35

Disk Defragmenter 35

locating 3

software installed

locating 3

software updates, installing 42

sound. See audio

sound settings, using 21

speaker volume action keys 13

speakers 14

connecting 20

special keys

identifying 11

using 11

specifications 57

standards and legislation,

accessibility 61

system restore 54

system restore point, creating 53

T

tap touchpad and touch screen

three-finger swipe touchpad

gesture 25

gesture 27

three-finger tap touchpad gesture

resources, accessibility 62

restoring 53

restoring and recovery methods 54

right control zone, identifying 8

right side components 3

26

C 21

touch screen gestures

one-finger slide 28

slide 28

tap 25

two-finger pinch zoom 25

settings 8

using 25

touchpad and touch screen gestures

tap 25

two-finger pinch zoom 25

touchpad buttons

identifying 8, 9

touchpad components 7

touchpad gestures

four-finger swipe 27

four-finger tap 27

three-finger swipe 27

three-finger tap 26

two-finger slide 26

two-finger tap 26

touchpad light, identifying 8

touchpad settings, adjusting 8

touchpad zone, identifying 8

transfer data 24

traveling with the computer 14, 39

turning off the computer 30

two-finger pinch zoom touchpad and

touch screen gesture 25

two-finger slide touchpad gesture

26

two-finger tap touchpad gesture 26

U

unresponsive system 30

updating drivers

Windows 10 S 36

updating programs

Windows 10 S 36

updating programs and drivers 36

Windows 10 36

USB SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep

and Charge, identifying 4

USB SuperSpeed port, identifying 4

USB Type-C port, connecting 21, 24

USB Type-C power connector and

SuperSpeed port with HP Sleep and

Charge, identifying 5

Thunderbolt port with HP Sleep and

Charge, identifying 6

using passwords 40

Thunderbolt, connecting USB Type-

USB Type-C power connector and

66

Index

using the keyboard and optional

mouse 28

using the touchpad 25

V

vents, identifying 10, 13, 14

video

HDMI port 22

Thunderbolt port device 21

USB Type-C 24

wireless displays 24

video, using 21

volume

adjusting 13

W

Windows

backup 53

recovery media 53

system restore point 53

Windows Hello 20

using 41

Windows key, identifying 11

Windows passwords 40

Windows tools, using 53

wired network (LAN) 19

wireless antennas, identifying 7

wireless button 16

wireless certification label 14

wireless controls

button 16

operating system 16

wireless light 16

wireless network (WLAN)

connecting 17

corporate WLAN connection 17

functional range 17

public WLAN connection 17

wireless network, securing 43

WLAN antennas, identifying 7

WLAN device 14

WLAN label 14

WWAN device 17

Index

67



 

 

Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental

Notices

User Guide

© Copyright 2018–2020 HP Development

Company, L.P.

Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its

proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license.

ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are

registered U.S. marks. Java is a registered

trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

The information contained herein is subject to

change without notice. The only warranties for

HP products and services are set forth in the

express warranty statements accompanying

such products and services. Nothing herein

should be construed as constituting an

additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for

technical or editorial errors or omissions

contained herein.

Sixth Edition: March 2020

First Edition: March 2018

Document Part Number: L25269-006

About This Guide

This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian,

and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations,

all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals.

To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your

product. Then select User Guides.

WARNING!

Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION:

Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates information considered important but not hazard-related (for example, messages

IMPORTANT:

related to property damage). Warns the user that failure to follow a procedure exactly as described could

result in loss of data or in damage to hardware or software. Also contains essential information to explain a

concept or to complete a task.

NOTE: Contains additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

TIP: Provides helpful hints for completing a task.

iii

iv

About This Guide

Table of contents

1 Regulatory notices ........................................................................................................................................ 1

Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................... 1

Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 1

Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2

Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2

Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................. 2

Belarus regulatory notice ...................................................................................................................................... 3

Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3

Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 3

European Union regulatory notices ....................................................................................................................... 3

Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 3

Products with radio functionality (EMF) ........................................................................... 4

Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) ....................... 4

Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and

countries only) .................................................................................................................. 4

Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................. 4

European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5

Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 5

China WWAN notice ................................................................................................................................................ 5

China radio equipment notice ................................................................................................................................ 5

Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6

Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth® certification markings ................................................ 6

Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6

Singapore wireless notice ...................................................................................................................................... 6

South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 7

Thailand wireless notice ........................................................................................................................................ 7

Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 8

電磁波警語 ......................................................................................................................................... 8

Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................................ 8

Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices .............................................. 8

Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8

User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8

Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 9

Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 9

Telecommunications device approvals ................................................................................................................. 9

Modem notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 10

v

U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................................... 10

Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 11

Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 11

New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 11

Voice support .................................................................................................................. 12

Macrovision Corporation notice ........................................................................................................................... 12

2 Safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 13

Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 13

Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 14

Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................................... 14

Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 14

Acoustics notice ................................................................................................................................................... 14

Battery notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 14

Fan notices ........................................................................................................................................................... 15

Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 15

Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 15

Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 16

Power supply class I grounding requirements .................................................................................. 16

Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 16

Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 16

Finland ............................................................................................................................. 16

Norway ............................................................................................................................ 16

Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 16

Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 16

China ................................................................................................................................ 17

For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 17

Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................................ 17

Power cord notice .............................................................................................................................. 17

DC plug of external HP power supply ............................................................................. 18

Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 18

Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 18

Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 18

TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 18

External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 18

Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 18

Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................................... 19

Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 19

China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 20

China altitude notice ......................................................................................................................... 20

China tropical warning notice ............................................................................................................ 20

vi

Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ....................................................... 21

Taiwan eyesight notice ........................................................................................................................................ 21

使用過度恐傷害視力 ....................................................................................................................... 21

3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 22

Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 22

Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 22

Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 22

Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 22

Taiwan battery recycling information ................................................................................................................. 23

Turkey WEEE regulation ...................................................................................................................................... 23

ENERGY STAR® Certification (select products only) ............................................................................................ 23

Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 24

Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................................. 24

Perchlorate material–special handling may apply ............................................................................................. 25

China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 25

China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 25

China RoHS ........................................................................................................................................................... 28

笔记本电脑和平板电脑产品中有害物质或元素的名称及含量 ................................................... 28

台式机、瘦客户端、个人工作站、一体机和销售点终端产品中有害物质或元素的名称

及含量 ............................................................................................................................................... 29

台灣針對筆記型電腦和平板電腦的有害物質限制使用管理辦法 (RoHS) ..................................................... 31

限用物質含有情況標示聲明書 ....................................................................................................... 31

台灣針對桌上型電腦、精簡型電腦、個人工作站、一體成形電腦及銷售點終端機的有害物質限制

使用管理辦法 (RoHS) ......................................................................................................................................... 32

限用物質含有情況標示聲明書 ....................................................................................................... 32

India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 33

Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 33

IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 33

Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 33

Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energía de México .................................................................. 34

TCO Certified ........................................................................................................................................................ 35

TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 36

Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 37

vii

viii

1

Regulatory notices

This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and

compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product.

One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices

may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous

locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for

authorization to use it before you turn it on.

Accessing regulatory labels

Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be

physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select products only), under the

removable service door (select products only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem

module.

Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the

system BIOS.

NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products.

NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID.

To view electronic regulatory labels:

Turn on or restart the computer.

Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press

enter.

To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and

then press OK.

NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and

installed devices.

5.

To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

– or –

Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter.

Federal Communications Commission notice

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful

interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency

energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular

installation.

Accessing regulatory labels

1

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined

by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more

of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and

This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired

operation.

●

●

●

●

1.

2.

●

●

For questions regarding this product:

●

Write to:

HP Inc.

1501 Page Mill Road

Palo Alto, CA 94304

Call HP at 650-857-1501

– or –

Email techregshelp@hp.com

To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product.

The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not

expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Modifications

Cables

To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with

shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods.

Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules

This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the

FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in

conformance with the expected typical usage.

2

Chapter 1 Regulatory notices

Belarus regulatory notice

The product complies with the Belarus National Radio/Telecom Technical Regulation TR 2018/024/BY.

Brazil notice

Canada notices

Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode causar interferência

em sistemas devidamente autorizados.

IMPORTANT: A alimentação de energia é predefinida para 220/230V. Se você possuir tomada elétrica de

110/115V, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tensão correta.

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment

Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies

with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the

Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is

in conformance with the expected typical usage.

IMPORTANT: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to

its operation in the 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used

indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to

co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25 GHz to

5.35 GHz and 5.65 GHz to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to

this device.

The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer.

European Union regulatory notices

Declaration of Conformity

Products bearing the CE marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member

State and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive

2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU.

Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards.

The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: http://www.hp.eu/certificates

(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the

regulatory label.)

Belarus regulatory notice

3

The point of contact for regulatory matters is HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Germany.

Email techregshelp@hp.com.

Products with radio functionality (EMF)

This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a

separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements.

Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU

requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation

distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product.

Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only)

IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.15–5.35 GHz frequency band is restricted for

IMPORTANT:

indoor use only in all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might

lead to interference issues with existing radio services.

IMPORTANT:

excluded in all countries reflected in the matrix.

Fixed outdoor installations for WiGig application (57–66 GHz frequency band) are

Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only)

Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW)

RFID; 865-868 MHz/915-921 MHz

2000/4000

WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2300/2600/3500 MHz

Radio Technology

Bluetooth; 2,4 GHz

NFC; 13,56 MHz

WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2,4 GHz

WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz

WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz

WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz

WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz

WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz

100

10

100

200

200

250

2000

1000

316

NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance.

Ergonomics notice

When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit

(VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the

application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions

comparable to a workstation setup.

4

Chapter 1 Regulatory notices

Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification)

Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without

external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use for VDU tasks.

During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sunlight) reflections may occur,

which result in reduced readability.

A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable ergonomic requirements if all

affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-

mouse and monitor.

European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax)

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking

accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/

regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every

PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the

first instance.

Australia and New Zealand notice

This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of

20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards.

The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the

requirements of AS/CA S008.

WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be

installed in any other device.

重要信息：本公司建议用户通过官方渠道进行系统更新，非官方渠道的更新可能会带来安全风险。

China WWAN notice

China radio equipment notice

型号核准代码显示在产品本体的铭牌上

Australia and New Zealand notice

5

Japan notice

V-2 規定適合の場合

この装置は、クラス B 情報技術装置です。この装置は、家庭環境で使用することを目的としていますが、この装置がラジオ

やテレビジ ョン受信機に近接して使用されると、受信障害を引き起こすことがあります。

取り扱い説明書に従 って正しい取り扱いをして下さい。

VCCI-B

VCCI32-1 規定適合の場合

取り扱い説明書に従 って正しい取り扱いをして下さい。

VCCI-B

この装置は、クラス B 機器です。この装置は、住宅環境で使用することを目的としていますが、この装置がラジオやテレビ

ジ ョン受信機に近接して使用されると、受信障害を引き起こすことがあります。

5GHz 帯を使用する特定無線設備は屋内使用に限られています。この機器を屋外で使用することは電波法で禁じられていま

す。

Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth® certification markings

この機器は、技術基準適合証明または工事設計認証を受けた無線設備を搭載しています。

This product contains certified radio equipment.

Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on

an e-label, please refer to the previous “Accessing regulatory labels” section.

一部の製品では、電子規定ラベル（e ラベル）が使用されています。e ラベルの技適マークと認証番

号を確認するには、「規定ラベルの確認」の項目をご覧ください

Mexico notice

Declaración para México

Singapore wireless notice

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o

dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier

interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.

Turn off any WWAN devices while you are aboard aircraft. The use of these devices aboard aircraft is illegal,

may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe

this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both.

Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting

operations are in progress.

As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the

equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to

the antennas during operation of the equipment.

6

Chapter 1 Regulatory notices

This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on

scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and

age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption

rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its

highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's

standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of

tissue.

South Korea notices

Thailand wireless notice

เครื

่องโทรคมนาคมและอุปกรณ์นี

้ มีความสอดคล้องตามมาตรฐานหรือข้อกําหนดของ กสทช.

(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.)

เครื

ใช้เครื

่องวิทยุคมนาคมนี

้มีระดับการแผ่คลื

่นแม่เหล็กไฟฟ้ าสอดคล้องตามมาตรฐานความปลอดภ ัยต่อสุขภาพของมนุษย์จากการ

่องวิทยุคมนาคมที

่คณะกรรมการกิจการโทรคมนาคมแห่งชาติประกาศกําหนด

This radio communication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance with the Safety

Standard for the Use of Radio communication Equipment on Human Health announced by the National

Telecommunications Commission.

South Korea notices

7

Taiwan NCC notices

電磁波警語

Wireless LAN 802.11a devices

Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices

Airline travel notice

Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline.

User-replaceable battery notices

When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household

waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal.

HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable

batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/

recycle.

For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product.

8

Chapter 1 Regulatory notices

Factory-sealed battery notices

The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the

battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support.

When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household

waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal.

Laser compliance

WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the

laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to

hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside.

Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those

specified in the laser product installation guide.

Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit.

●

●

●

This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber

optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in

accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard.

Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those

regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56,

dated May 8, 2019.

Telecommunications device approvals

The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the

countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of

the computer or on the modem.

Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or

region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located

may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that

country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection

is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region

is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus

should not be used.

Factory-sealed battery notices

9

Modem notices

U.S. modem statements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the

bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product

identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are

requested to do so.

Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises

wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted

by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be

connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details.

The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive

RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not

all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be

connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products

approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format

US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of

0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.

If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in

advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the

telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a

complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.

The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could

affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in

order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service.

If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the

telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the

problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the

“Troubleshooting” section of the user guide, if one is provided.

Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public

service commission, or corporation commission for information.

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the

installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what

will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other

electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a

margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and

time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and

the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone

number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges).

In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the

faxing software instructions.

10

Chapter 1 Regulatory notices

Canada modem statements

This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.

The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be

connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of

devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN

for this terminal equipment is 1.0.

Japan modem statements

If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the

appropriate certification marking below.

The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the

appropriate certification marking below.

The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements

The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that

the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the

product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any

item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or

model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.

This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for

which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances.

If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always

continue to support pulse dialing.

Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to

bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should

not contact the Telecom Faults Service.

Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the

equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the

following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

Modem notices

11

a.

b.

There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any

single manual call initiation.

The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one

attempt and the beginning of the next attempt.

c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a

period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next

attempt.

d.

The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of

ringing (So set between 2 and 10).

Voice support

All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This

requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the

Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal

information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any

other party.

This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom ‘111' Emergency Service.

Macrovision Corporation notice

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S.

patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use

of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for

home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse

engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

12

Chapter 1 Regulatory notices

2

Safety notices

Important safety information

WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper

workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical

and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the

Documentation CD that is included with the product.

The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it.

Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computer’s main AC disconnecting device

and must be easily accessible at all times. If the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded

plug, always use the power cord with a properly grounded AC outlet to avoid the risk of electric shock.

To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC

outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your

computer from the AC power outlet.

Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer

cover.

Do not operate the computer with the cover removed.

For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications

systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to

do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power

supply and modem of this product.

As a safety precaution, if the system power load exceeds the specific configuration’s capacities, the system

may temporarily disable some USB ports.

WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always

follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near water—for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry

tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.

Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from

lightning.

Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak.

Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an

uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component.

If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger

telecommunication line cord.

Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power

IMPORTANT:

system, the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular

country/region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can

damage your computer and void any implied warranty.

●

●

●

●

●

●

Important safety information

13

This product has not been evaluated for connection to an “IT” power system (an AC distribution system with

no direct connection to earth, according to applicable safety standards).

Heat-related safety warning notice

WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the mobile computer, do not

place the mobile computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the mobile computer

only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft

surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the

skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The mobile computer and the AC

adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards.

Potential safety conditions notice

If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for

these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner.

However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn

off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance.

Installation conditions

See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply.

WARNING! Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment

before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment.

Acoustics notice

Battery notices

Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779).

To display product noise emission data, go to “IT ECO Declarations” at http://www.hp.com/go/ted, and then

select a product category from the drop-down menu.

WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or

alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly.

WARNING! Do not attempt to recharge the battery.

WARNING! Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60° C (140° F).

WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement

battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the

computer. Fast charging may not be available for non-compatible or non-HP batteries.

WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts,

or dispose of in fire or water.

WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according

to the instructions.

WARNING! Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product.

14

Chapter 2 Safety notices

WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard.

WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it

can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death.

WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children.

If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away

WARNING!

from children.

WARNING!

immediate medical attention.

If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek

WARNING!

explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas.

Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an

WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of

flammable liquid or gas.

Icon

Description

Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household

waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or

return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents.

Fan notices

WARNING!

Keep body parts away from moving parts.

WARNING! Keep body parts away from fan blades.

WARNING! Keep body parts out of the motion path.

Headset and earphone volume level notice

WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods.

Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may

increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors

influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating

system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and

therefore the sound pressure level.

Laser safety

For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers.

This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic

transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard

IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements.

Fan notices

15

Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those

regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56,

dated May 8, 2019.

WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein

or in the laser product’s installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of

exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside.

Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those

specified herein.

Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit.

●

●

●

Power supply and power cord set requirements

Power supply class I grounding requirements

For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the

system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide

adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or an HP Inc. authorized

replacement.

Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia elétrica que possua

aterramento (três pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurança dos usuários contra choques

elétricos.

Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord.

Laite on liitettävä suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan.

Brazil notice

Denmark

Finland

Norway

Sweden

Apparatet må tilkoples jordet stikkontakt.

Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag.

Power supply requirements

The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the

product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on

those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the

incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage.

WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a

replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used

with the computer.

16

Chapter 2 Safety notices

China

For use in Norway

消费者若使用电源适配器供电，则应购买配套使用获得 CCC 认证并满足标准要求的电源适配器

Some products are designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230 V.

Power cord set requirements

●

●

●

WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times.

Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet.

If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The

grounding pin is an important safety feature.

The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the

equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized

replacement power cord from HP Inc. or an approved HP Inc. source. Replacement part numbers may be found

at http://www.hp.com/support.

Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the

product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or

service provider.

WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products.

Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard.

The requirement listed below is applicable to all countries:

▲ The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the

country where the power cord set will be installed.

The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or

against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits

from the product.

WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in

any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards.

Power cord notice

If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for

use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region.

The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's

electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and

current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm²/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions

about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider.

A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or

against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits

from the product.

Power supply and power cord set requirements

17

DC plug of external HP power supply

Japan power cord notice

製品には、同梱された電源コードをお使い下さい。

同梱された電源コードは、他の製品では使用出来ません。

Japan power cord requirements

For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product.

CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products.

Pinch hazard

WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts.

TV antenna connectors protection

External television antenna grounding

If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is

electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper

electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Lightning protection

For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system.

This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges.

18

Chapter 2 Safety notices

Table 2-1 Antenna Grounding

Reference

Grounding Component

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Electric Service Equipment

Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III)

Ground Clamps

Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21)

Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20)

Ground Clamp

Antenna Lead-in Wire

Note to CATV system installer

This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installer’s attention to section 820.93 of the National

Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable

shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

Travel notice

WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power

the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances.

Travel notice

19

China safety notices

China altitude notice

海拔警告仅适用于在海拔 2000m 以下地区使用的产品

Icon

Description

海拔警告仅适用于在海拔 2000m 以下地区使用的产品。

China tropical warning notice

热带警告仅适用于在非热带气候条件下使用的产品。

Icon

Description

热带警告仅适用于在非热带气候条件下使用的产品。

20

Chapter 2 Safety notices

Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a

TV tuner

CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution

system.

Taiwan eyesight notice

使用過度恐傷害視力

注意事項:

(1) 使用 30 分鐘請休息 10 分鐘。

(2) 未滿 2 歲幼兒不看螢幕，2 歲以上每天看螢幕不要超過 1 小時。

Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner

21

3

Environmental notices

This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some

of these notices may not apply to your product.

Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling

HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and

rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle.

For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/.

Disposal of waste equipment by users

Icon

Description

This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect

human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for

the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household

waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle.

Brazil alkaline battery disposal

Icon

Description

Este produto eletroeletrônico e seus componentes não daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora

estejam em conformidade com padrões mundiais de restrição a substâncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que

em quantidades mínimas, substâncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida útil deste produto, o

usuário deverá entregá-lo à HP. A não observância dessa orientação sujeitará o infrator às sanções previstas

em lei. Após o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP deverão ser entregues ao estabelecimento

comercial ou rede de assistência técnica autorizada pela HP.

Para maiores informações , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar

Não descarte o

produto eletrônico

em lixo comum

Brazil hardware recycling information

Icon

Description

Este produto eletroeletrônico e seus componentes não daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora

estejam em conformidade com padrões mundiais de restrição a substâncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que

em quantidades mínimas, substâncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida útil deste produto, o

usuário deverá entregá-lo à HP. A não observância dessa orientação sujeitará o infrator às sanções previstas

em lei. Após o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP deverão ser entregues ao estabelecimento

comercial ou rede de assistência técnica autorizada pela HP.

Para maiores informações , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar

Não descarte o

produto eletrônico

em lixo comum

22

Chapter 3 Environmental notices

Taiwan battery recycling information

Icon

Description

The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the

Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions.

Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal.

Turkey WEEE regulation

Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur

ENERGY STAR® Certification (select products only)

ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and

individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the

ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements

set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S.

EPA’s enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are

ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY

STAR-certified computers:

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly

reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to

automatically enter a low power “sleep” mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of

inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on

AC power:

Computer type

Time to activate display sleep

mode

Time to activate computer

sleep mode (minutes)

Resuming from sleep mode

Notebooks, Mobile

Workstations

Less than or equal to 15

minutes (varies by model)

Less than or equal to 30

minutes (varies by model)

Tablets/Slates

Less than or equal to 1 minute

Not applicable

Not applicable

Desktops, Integrated

Desktops, Workstations

Less than or equal to 15

minutes (varies by model)

Less than or equal to 30

minutes (varies by model)

Product will exit sleep mode

when the power/sleep button is

pressed.

If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is

enabled, the system can

resume from sleep in response

to a network signal.

Product will exit sleep mode

when user interacts with any

input device, including the

mouse or keyboard.

If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is

enabled, the system can

Taiwan battery recycling information

23

Computer type

Time to activate display sleep

mode

Time to activate computer

sleep mode (minutes)

Resuming from sleep mode

Thin clients

Less than or equal to 15

minutes (varies by model)

Less than or equal to 30

minutes when sleep mode is

supported by the operating

system (varies by model)

resume from sleep in response

to a network signal.

When sleep mode is supported

by operating system product

will exit sleep mode when user

interacts with any input device,

including the mouse or

keyboard.

If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is

enabled, the system can

resume from sleep in response

to a network signal.

For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in

the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10

Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic,

with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity.

The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is

enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal.

Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can

be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement.

Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA

ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov.

ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental

Protection Agency.

Chemical substances

Mercury statement

HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products

as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European

Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at

http://www.hp.com/go/reach.

This statement applies to all-in-one computers with built-in display panels that do not use LED backlighting.

This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

●

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD

Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling

information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org).

24

Chapter 3 Environmental notices

Perchlorate material–special handling may apply

The computer’s real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when

recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/.

China environmental notices

China PC energy label

In accordance with “The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers”, this

microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy

Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the

standard GB28380-2012.

1.

Energy Efficiency Grades

The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of

all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of

any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type

TEC (kilowatt hour)

Desktop microcomputer, AIO

Category A

98.0+∑Efa

148.0+∑Efa

198.0+∑Efa

Grade 1

Grade 2

Grade 3

Category B

125.0+∑Efa

175.0+∑Efa

225.0+∑Efa

Category C

159.0+∑Efa

209.0+∑Efa

259.0+∑Efa

Category D

184.0+∑Efa

234.0+∑Efa

284.0+∑Efa

Perchlorate material–special handling may apply

25

Product Type

TEC (kilowatt hour)

Portable Computer

Category A

20.0+∑Efa

35.0+∑Efa

45.0+∑Efa

Category B

26.0+∑Efa

45.0+∑Efa

65.0+∑Efa

Category C

54.5+∑Efa

75.0+∑Efa

123.5+∑Efa

NOTE: ∑Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions.

2.

Typical Energy Consumption

The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative

configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to

“The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy

consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label.

3.

Product Category

The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputer’s configuration.

The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type

Category A

Category B

Category C

Configuration Description

Desktop microcomputer, AIO

Portable Computer

The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose

configuration is out of the scope of Category

B, C, and D

The portable computer whose configuration is

out of the scope of Category B and C

CPU physical core number of 2, and system

memory of not less than 2 GB

A Discrete GPU

CPU physical core number of over 2, with at

least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 2 GB

The product that has a CPU physical core

number of not less than 2, system memory of

not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame

Buffer Width not less than 128-bit.

A Discrete GPU

1.

2.

1.

2.

Category D

CPU physical core number of not less than 4,

with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 4 GB

A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width

not less than 128-bit

For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012.

26

Chapter 3 Environmental notices

China PC energy label

27

China RoHS

笔记本电脑和平板电脑产品中有害物质或元素的名称及含量

根据中国《电器电子产品有害物质限制使用管理办法》

部件名称

铅 (Pb)

汞 (Hg)

镉 (Cd)

多溴联苯 (PBB)

多溴二苯醚 (PBDE)

有害物质

六价铬

(Cr(VI))

电池

线缆

摄像头

机箱/其他

闪存读卡器

软盘驱动器

硬盘驱动器

耳机

I/O PCA

键盘

液晶显示器 (LCD) 面板

介质（CD/DVD/软盘）

主板、处理器、散热器

内存

鼠标

光盘驱动器

对接设备选件

电源适配器

电源

电源组

投影仪

遥控器

智能卡/Java™ 读卡器

扬声器（外置）

O

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

28

Chapter 3 Environmental notices

铅 (Pb)

汞 (Hg)

镉 (Cd)

多溴联苯 (PBB)

多溴二苯醚 (PBDE)

有害物质

六价铬

(Cr(VI))

本表格依据 SJ/T 11364 的规定编制。

O：表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 GB/T 26572 规定的限量要求以下。

X：表示该有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 GB/T 26572 规定的限量要求。

此表中所有名称中含 "X" 的部件均符合中国 RoHS 达标管理目录限用物质应用例外清单的豁免。

此表中所有名称中含 "X" 的部件均符合欧盟 RoHS 立法。

注：环保使用期限的参考标识取决于产品正常工作的温度和湿度等条件

台式机、瘦客户端、个人工作站、一体机和销售点终端产品中有害物质或元素的

名称及含量

根据中国《电器电子产品有害物质限制使用管理办法》

部件名称

电视调谐器

USB 闪存驱动器

USB 集线器

网络摄像头

无线接收器

无线网卡

电池

线缆

摄像头

机箱/其他

风扇

闪存读卡器

软盘驱动器

硬盘驱动器

耳机

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

部件名称

铅 (Pb)

汞 (Hg)

镉 (Cd)

多溴联苯 (PBB)

多溴二苯醚 (PBDE)

有害物质

六价铬

(Cr(VI))

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

China RoHS

29

部件名称

铅 (Pb)

汞 (Hg)

镉 (Cd)

多溴联苯 (PBB)

多溴二苯醚 (PBDE)

有害物质

六价铬

(Cr(VI))

散热器

I/O PCA

键盘

内存

鼠标

光驱

液晶显示器 (LCD) 面板

介质（CD/DVD/软盘）

主板、处理器、散热器

对接设备选件

电源适配器

电源

投影仪

遥控器

智能卡/Java™ 读卡器

固态驱动器

扬声器（外置）

触控笔

触控板

电视调谐器

USB 闪存驱动器

USB 集线器

网络摄像头

无线接收器

无线网卡

3D 捕获台/转盘

X

X

X

X

O

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

本表格依据 SJ/T 11364 的规定编制。

O：表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 GB/T 26572 规定的限量要求以下。

X：表示该有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 GB/T 26572 规定的限量要求。

此表中所有名称中含 "X" 的部件均符合中国 RoHS 达标管理目录限用物质应用例外清单的豁免。

此表中所有名称中含 "X" 的部件均符合欧盟 RoHS 立法。

注：环保使用期限的参考标识取决于产品正常工作的温度和湿度等条件

30

Chapter 3 Environmental notices

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

台灣針對筆記型電腦和平板電腦的有害物質限制使用管理辦法

(RoHS)

限用物質含有情況標示聲明書

Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking

限用物質及其化學符號

Restricted substances and its chemical symbols

單元 Unit

鉛 Lead (Pb) 汞 Mercury (Hg) 鎘 Cadmium (Cd) 六價鉻

Hexavalent

chromium (Cr+6)

多溴聯苯

Polybrominated

biphenyls (PBB)

多溴二苯醚

Polybrominated

diphenyl ethers

(PBDE)

纜線 Cables

機殼/其他

Chassis/Other

輸入/輸出印刷

電路組件 I/O

PCAs

液晶顯示器

(LCD) 面板

Liquid crystal

display (LCD)

panel

記憶體 Memory

主機板、處理

器、散熱器

Motherboard,

processor, heat

sinks

電源組 Power

pack

電源供應器

Power supply

儲存裝置

Storage Devices

無線裝置

Wireless Devices

—

—

—

—

Օ

—

—

—

—

—

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

備考 1： 「超出 0.1 %」及「超出 0.01 %」係指限用物質之百分比含量超出百分比含量基準值。

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the

reference percentage value of presence condition.

備考 2： 「Օ」係指該項限用物質之百分比含量未超出百分比含量基準值。

Note 2: "Օ" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of

presence.

備考 3： 「—」係指該項限用物質為排除項目。

Note 3: The "—" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption.

台灣針對筆記型電腦和平板電腦的有害物質限制使用管理辦法 (RoHS)

31

若要取得最新版使用指南，請前往 http://www.hp.com/support，並依照指示尋找您的產品。然後選取

「使用指南」。

To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your

product. Then select User Guides.

台灣針對桌上型電腦、精簡型電腦、個人工作站、一體成形電

腦及銷售點終端機的有害物質限制使用管理辦法 (RoHS)

限用物質含有情況標示聲明書

Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking

限用物質及其化學符號

Restricted substances and its chemical symbols

鉛 Lead

(Pb)

汞 Mercury

(Hg)

鎘 Cadmium

(Cd)

六價鉻

Hexavalent

chromium (Cr

+6)

多溴聯苯

Polybrominated

biphenyls (PBB)

多溴二苯醚

Polybrominated

diphenyl ethers

(PBDE)

單元 Unit

纜線 Cables

機座/其他 Chassis/Other

輸入/輸出印刷電路組件

I/O PCAs

液晶顯示器 (LCD) 面板

Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel (for AIO only)

記憶體 Memory

主機板、處理器、散熱

器 Motherboard,

processor, heat sinks

電源供應器 Power supply

儲存裝置 Storage Devices

—

—

—

—

Օ

—

—

—

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

Օ

備考 1： 「超出 0.1 %」及「超出 0.01 %」係指限用物質之百分比含量超出百分比含量基準值。

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the

reference percentage value of presence condition.

備考 2： 「Օ」係指該項限用物質之百分比含量未超出百分比含量基準值。

Note 2: "Օ" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of

presence.

備考 3： 「—」係指該項限用物質為排除項目。

Note 3: The "—" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption.

若要取得最新版使用指南，請前往 http://www.hp.com/support，並依照指示尋找您的產品。然後選取

「使用指南」。

To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your

product. Then select User Guides.

32

Chapter 3 Environmental notices

India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS)

This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous

substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016." It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent

chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1

weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule

2 of the Rule.

Information for European Union Commission Regulation

1275/2008

To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired

network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 “Additional information” of the

product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

itecodesktop-pc.html.

Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product

user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support.

IT ECO declarations

Notebook or tablet PCs

http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/iteconotebook-o.html

Desktop PCs and Thin Clients

Workstations

http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN

http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html

Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS)

2008 年、日本における製品含有表示方法、JISC0950 改定版が公示されました。製造事業者は、2006

年 7 月 1 日以降に販売される電気・電子機器の特定化学物質の含有に付きまして情報提供を義務付

けられています。

製品の部材表示に付きましては、http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950/ を参照してください。

A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers

provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July

1, 2006.

To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950.

India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS)

33

Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energía de

México

Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energía de México

Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energía

de México, que requiere la divulgación del consumo de energía del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del

modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo

de energía del modo inactivo de su configuración específica puede diferir de la información de la etiqueta. El

consumo real de energía de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de

energía de producto para México a causa de factores como la configuración (componentes y módulos

seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se están efectuando, software instalado y en ejecución, etc.).

NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a las estaciones de trabajo.

34

Chapter 3 Environmental notices

TCO Certified

This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo.

TCO Certified

35

TCO Certified Edge

This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo.

36

Chapter 3 Environmental notices

Symbols/Numerics

台灣對於危險物質的限制注意事

notebook computers

modifications 2

notebook computers notice 1

Index

項 31, 32

注意事項

台灣有害物質限制 31, 32

A

airline travel notice 8

altitude notice 20

B

battery 14

battery notice 8, 9, 22

battery recycling 22

Belarus regulatory notice 3

Brazil notice 3, 16

C

cable grounding notice 21

Canada modem statement 11

Canada notices 3

China environmental notices 25

China PC energy label 25

D

disposal notices

battery 22

battery, user replacement 8

equipment 22

factory sealed battery 9

E

electronic hardware and battery

recycling 22

ENERGY STAR certification 23

environmental notices 22

equipment disposal notice 22

ergonomics notice 4, 5

European Union Commission

Regulation 1275/2008 33

F

fan notice 15

Federal Communications Commission

notebook computers cables 2

G

GS Notice 4, 5

H

headset and earphone volume level

notice 15

I

India restriction of hazardous

substances notice 33

J

Japan modem statement 11

Japan notice 6

Japan power cord notice 18

Japan restriction of hazardous

substances notice 33

L

labels, regulatory 1

laser safety notice 9, 15

M

Macrovision Corporation notice 12

maximum power levels 4

Mexico wireless notice 6

modem notices 10

modem statements

Canada 11

Japan 11

New Zealand 11

U.S. 10

modifications, notebook computers

Federal Communications

Commission 2

N

New Zealand modem statement 11

notices

airline travel 8

battery 8, 9, 14, 22

Belarus regulatory 3

Brazil 3, 16

Canada 3

environmental 22

equipment disposal 22

ergonomics 4, 5

fan 15

headset and earphone volume

level 15

India restriction of hazardous

substances 33

Japan 6

Japan power cord 18

Japan restriction of hazardous

substances 33

laser safety 9, 15

Macrovision Corporation 12

Mexico 6

modem 10

perchlorate material 25

power cords 17

Singapore 6

South Korea 7

Taiwan 8

Thailand wireless notice 7

travel 19

notices, notebook computers

Federal Communications

Commission 1

P

power cord notice 17

R

radio frequency bands 4

recycling, electronic hardware and

battery 22

S

Singapore wireless notice 6

South Korea notice 7

T

Taiwan notice 8

TCO Certified Certification 35

Index

37

TCO Certified Edge Certification 36

Thailand wireless notice 7

travel notice 19

tropical warning notice 20

TV tuner, cable grounding notice 21

U

U.S. modem statement 10

V

voice support 12

volume level notice, headset and

earphone 15

W

wireless LAN devices 2

38

Index